FCC ID: I88NBG5615 Simultaneous Dual-Band Wireless N750 Media Router

N BG5 6 1 5 Simultaneous Dual-Band Wireless N750 Media Router Version 1.00 Edition 1, 12/2012 Quick Start Guide Users Guide Default Login Det ails LAN IP Address http://192.168.1.1

(Router Mode) http://192.168.1.2

(Access Point Mode) www.zyxel.com Password 1234 Copyright 2012 ZyXEL Communications Corporation IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE. KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Related Documentation

Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the NBG5615 and access the Web Configurator wizards. It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access. 2 NBG5615 Users Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Users Guide .......................................................................................................................................13 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................15 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility .......................................................................................................21 Connection Wizard ..................................................................................................................................27 Introducing the Web Configurator ...........................................................................................................39 NBG5615 Modes .....................................................................................................................................43 Easy Mode ..............................................................................................................................................45 Router Mode ...........................................................................................................................................57 Access Point Mode .................................................................................................................................65 Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................................73 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................87 Monitor ....................................................................................................................................................89 WAN ........................................................................................................................................................95 Wireless LAN ........................................................................................................................................105 LAN .......................................................................................................................................................129 DHCP Server ........................................................................................................................................133 NAT .......................................................................................................................................................139 DDNS ....................................................................................................................................................149 Static Route ...........................................................................................................................................151 Firewall ..................................................................................................................................................155 Content Filtering ....................................................................................................................................161 Bandwidth Management .......................................................................................................................165 Remote Management ............................................................................................................................173 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ...........................................................................................................177 USB Media Sharing ...............................................................................................................................183 Maintenance ..........................................................................................................................................193 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................203 NBG5615 Users Guide 3 Contents Overview 4 NBG5615 Users Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3 Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5 Part I: Users Guide ......................................................................................... 13 Chapter 1 Introduction.........................................................................................................................................15 1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................15 1.2 Applications .......................................................................................................................................15 1.3 Ways to Manage the NBG5615 ........................................................................................................16 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG5615 .........................................................................................16 1.5 Resetting the NBG5615 ....................................................................................................................16 1.5.1 How to Use the RESET Button ................................................................................................16 1.6 The WPS Button ...............................................................................................................................16 1.7 LEDs .................................................................................................................................................18 1.8 Wall Mounting ...................................................................................................................................19 Chapter 2 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility..................................................................................................21 2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................21 2.1.1 Quick Setup .............................................................................................................................21 2.1.2 Installing ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility .........................................................................21 2.2 The ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility ..........................................................................................22 2.2.1 The Menus ...............................................................................................................................23 2.2.2 The ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Configuration Window ......................................................24 2.2.3 The Auto-Connect Printer List Window ...................................................................................25 2.2.4 Exit the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility ...........................................................................26 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard .............................................................................................................................27 3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................27 3.2 Accessing the Wizard ........................................................................................................................27 3.3 Connect to Internet ............................................................................................................................28 3.3.1 Connection Type: IPoE ............................................................................................................29 3.3.2 Connection Type: PPPoE ........................................................................................................30 3.3.3 Connection Type: PPTP ..........................................................................................................32 3.4 Router Password ...............................................................................................................................33 NBG5615 Users Guide 5 Table of Contents 3.5 Wireless Security ..............................................................................................................................34 3.5.1 Wireless Security: No Security ................................................................................................34 3.5.2 Wireless Security: WPA2-PSK .................................................................................................35 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator ....................................................................................................39 4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................39 4.2 Accessing the Web Configurator .......................................................................................................39 4.2.1 Login Screen ...........................................................................................................................39 4.2.2 Password Screen ....................................................................................................................40 Chapter 5 NBG5615 Modes .................................................................................................................................43 5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................43 5.1.1 Web Configurator Modes .........................................................................................................43 5.1.2 Device Modes ..........................................................................................................................43 Chapter 6 Easy Mode ...........................................................................................................................................45 6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................45 6.2 What You Can Do .............................................................................................................................46 6.3 What You Need to Know ...................................................................................................................46 6.4 Navigation Panel ...............................................................................................................................46 6.5 Network Map .....................................................................................................................................47 6.6 Control Panel ....................................................................................................................................48 6.6.1 Game Engine ...........................................................................................................................49 6.6.2 Power Saving ..........................................................................................................................49 6.6.3 Content Filter ...........................................................................................................................50 6.6.4 Bandwidth MGMT ....................................................................................................................51 6.6.5 Firewall ....................................................................................................................................52 6.6.6 Wireless Security .....................................................................................................................52 6.6.7 WPS ........................................................................................................................................53 6.7 Status Screen in Easy Mode .............................................................................................................54 Chapter 7 Router Mode........................................................................................................................................57 7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................57 7.2 Router Mode Status Screen ..............................................................................................................57 7.2.1 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................60 Chapter 8 Access Point Mode.............................................................................................................................65 8.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................65 6 NBG5615 Users Guide Table of Contents 8.2 What You Can Do .............................................................................................................................65 8.3 What You Need to Know ...................................................................................................................65 8.3.1 Setting your NBG5615 to AP Mode .........................................................................................66 8.3.2 Accessing the Web Configurator in Access Point Mode ..........................................................66 8.3.3 Configuring your WLAN and Maintenance Settings ................................................................67 8.4 AP Mode Status Screen ....................................................................................................................67 8.4.1 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................69 8.5 LAN Screen .......................................................................................................................................69 Chapter 9 Tutorials...............................................................................................................................................73 9.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................73 9.2 Set Up a Wireless Network with WPS ...............................................................................................73 9.2.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC) ............................................................................................73 9.2.2 PIN Configuration ....................................................................................................................74 9.3 Configure Wireless Security without WPS ........................................................................................75 9.3.1 Configure Your Notebook ........................................................................................................77 9.4 Using Multiple SSIDs on the NBG5615 .............................................................................................79 9.4.1 Configuring Security Settings of Multiple SSIDs ......................................................................80 9.5 Automatically Connecting to a USB Printer .......................................................................................84 Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 87 Chapter 10 Monitor.................................................................................................................................................89 10.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................89 10.2 What You Can Do ...........................................................................................................................89 10.3 The Log Screen ...............................................................................................................................89 10.3.1 View Log ................................................................................................................................89 10.4 DHCP Table .................................................................................................................................90 10.5 Packet Statistics ...........................................................................................................................91 10.6 WLAN Station Status ...................................................................................................................92 Chapter 11 WAN .....................................................................................................................................................95 11.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................95 11.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................................95 11.3 What You Need To Know .................................................................................................................95 11.3.1 Configuring Your Internet Connection ....................................................................................96 11.4 Internet Connection .........................................................................................................................97 11.4.1 IPoE Encapsulation ................................................................................................................97 NBG5615 Users Guide 7 Table of Contents 11.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation ............................................................................................................99 11.4.3 PPTP Encapsulation ............................................................................................................101 11.5 Advanced WAN Screen .................................................................................................................104 Chapter 12 Wireless LAN.....................................................................................................................................105 12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................105 12.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................106 12.1.2 What You Should Know .......................................................................................................106 12.2 General Wireless LAN Screen ..................................................................................................... 110 12.3 Wireless Security .......................................................................................................................... 112 12.3.1 No Security .......................................................................................................................... 112 12.3.2 WEP Encryption .................................................................................................................. 113 12.3.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK ......................................................................................................... 115 12.3.4 WPA/WPA2 .......................................................................................................................... 116 12.4 More AP Screen ............................................................................................................................ 118 12.4.1 More AP Edit ....................................................................................................................... 119 12.5 MAC Filter Screen ........................................................................................................................121 12.6 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen ...................................................................................................123 12.7 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen ...................................................................................................123 12.8 WPS Screen ..................................................................................................................................124 12.9 WPS Station Screen ......................................................................................................................126 12.10 Scheduling Screen ......................................................................................................................126 Chapter 13 LAN ....................................................................................................................................................129 13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................129 13.2 What You Can Do .........................................................................................................................129 13.3 What You Need To Know ..............................................................................................................129 13.3.1 IP Pool Setup .......................................................................................................................130 13.3.2 LAN TCP/IP .........................................................................................................................130 13.3.3 IP Alias ................................................................................................................................130 13.4 LAN IP Screen ..............................................................................................................................130 13.5 IP Alias Screen ..............................................................................................................................131 Chapter 14 DHCP Server .....................................................................................................................................133 14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................133 14.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................133 14.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................133 14.2 DHCP Server General Screen ......................................................................................................133 14.3 DHCP Server Advanced Screen ................................................................................................134 14.4 DHCP Client List Screen ...............................................................................................................136 8 NBG5615 Users Guide Table of Contents Chapter 15 NAT.....................................................................................................................................................139 15.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................139 15.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................139 15.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................140 15.2 General .........................................................................................................................................141 15.3 Port Forwarding Screen ...............................................................................................................142 15.3.1 Port Forwarding Edit Screen ..............................................................................................144 15.4 Port Trigger Screen .......................................................................................................................145 15.5 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................146 15.5.1 NATPort Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers ..............................................................146 15.5.2 NAT Port Forwarding Example ............................................................................................146 15.5.3 Trigger Port Forwarding .......................................................................................................147 15.5.4 Trigger Port Forwarding Example ........................................................................................147 15.5.5 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports ...................................................................148 Chapter 16 DDNS..................................................................................................................................................149 16.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................149 16.1.1 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................149 16.2 General .......................................................................................................................................149 Chapter 17 Static Route .......................................................................................................................................151 17.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................151 17.2 IP Static Route Screen .................................................................................................................151 17.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route ..........................................................................................................152 Chapter 18 Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................155 18.1 Overview .....................................................................................................................................155 18.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................155 18.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................155 18.2 General Screen ............................................................................................................................157 18.3 Services Screen ............................................................................................................................157 Chapter 19 Content Filtering ...............................................................................................................................161 19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................161 19.1.1 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................161 19.2 Content Filter .................................................................................................................................161 19.3 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................163 19.3.1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking ...................................................................163 NBG5615 Users Guide 9 Table of Contents Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management...................................................................................................................165 20.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................165 20.2 What You Can Do .........................................................................................................................165 20.3 What You Need To Know ..............................................................................................................166 20.4 General Screen ............................................................................................................................166 20.5 Advanced Screen .........................................................................................................................166 20.5.1 Rule Configuration: Application Rule Configuration ...........................................................168 20.5.2 Rule Configuration: User Defined Service Rule Configuration .........................................169 20.5.3 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services .....................................................................171 Chapter 21 Remote Management........................................................................................................................173 21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................173 21.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter .................................................................................................173 21.3 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................173 21.3.1 Remote Management and NAT ...........................................................................................174 21.3.2 System Timeout ..................................................................................................................174 21.4 WWW Screen .............................................................................................................................174 21.5 Telnet Screen .............................................................................................................................175 21.6 Wake On LAN Screen ...................................................................................................................175 Chapter 22 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)......................................................................................................177 22.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................177 22.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................177 22.2.1 NAT Traversal ......................................................................................................................177 22.2.2 Cautions with UPnP .............................................................................................................177 22.3 UPnP Screen ...............................................................................................................................178 22.4 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................178 22.4.1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example .................................................................................178 22.4.2 Web Configurator Easy Access ...........................................................................................180 Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing...........................................................................................................................183 23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................183 23.2 What You Can Do .........................................................................................................................184 23.3 What You Need To Know ..............................................................................................................184 23.4 Before You Begin ..........................................................................................................................185 23.5 DLNA Screen ................................................................................................................................186 23.6 SAMBA Screen .............................................................................................................................186 23.7 FTP Screen ...................................................................................................................................188 23.8 Example of Accessing Your Shared Files From a Computer ........................................................189 10 NBG5615 Users Guide Table of Contents 23.8.1 Use Windows Explorer to Share Files .................................................................................189 23.8.2 Use FTP to Share Files .......................................................................................................191 Chapter 24 Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................193 24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................193 24.2 What You Can Do .........................................................................................................................193 24.3 General Screen .............................................................................................................................193 24.4 Password Screen ..........................................................................................................................194 24.5 Time Setting Screen ......................................................................................................................195 24.6 Firmware Upgrade Screen ............................................................................................................196 24.7 Configuration Backup/Restore Screen ..........................................................................................198 24.8 Restart Screen ..............................................................................................................................199 24.9 Language Screen ..........................................................................................................................199 24.10 System Operation Mode Overview .............................................................................................200 24.11 Sys OP Mode Screen ..................................................................................................................201 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................203 25.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................203 25.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................203 25.3 NBG5615 Access and Login .........................................................................................................204 25.4 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................205 25.5 Resetting the NBG5615 to Its Factory Defaults ............................................................................207 25.6 Wireless Connections ...................................................................................................................207 25.7 USB Device Problems ...................................................................................................................209 25.8 ZyXEL Share Center Utility Problems ...........................................................................................209 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions ................................................... 211 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address ......................................................................221 Appendix C Common Services........................................................................................................249 Appendix D Legal Information .........................................................................................................253 Index ..................................................................................................................................................259 NBG5615 Users Guide 11 Table of Contents 12 NBG5615 Users Guide PART I Users Guide 13 14 C HAPTER 1 Introduction 1.1 Overview This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the NBG5615. The NBG5615 extends the range of your existing wired network without additional wiring, providing easy network access to mobile users. You can set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802.11a/b/

g/n compatible devices. The NBG5615 is able to function both 2.4GHz and 5GHz networks at the same time. A range of services such as a firewall and content filtering are also available for secure Internet computing. There are two USB 2.0 ports on the side panel of your NBG5615. You can connect USB (version 2.0 or lower) memory sticks, USB hard drives, or USB devices for file sharing. The NBG5615 automatically detects the USB devices. Note: For the USB function, it is strongly recommended to use version 2.0 or lower USB storage devices (such as memory sticks, USB hard drives) and/or USB devices

(such as USB printers). Other USB products are not guaranteed to function properly with the NBG5615. Note: Be sure to install the ZyXEL NetUSBTM Share Center Utility (for NetUSB functionality) from the included disc, or download the latest version from the zyxel.com website. 1.2 Applications Your can have the following networks using the NBG5615:

W ired. You can connect network devices via the Ethernet ports of the NBG5615 so that they can communicate with each other and access the Internet.

W ireless. Wireless clients can connect to the NBG5615 to access network resources. You can use WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) to create an instant network connection with another WPS-

compatible device.

W AN . Connect to a broadband modem/router for Internet access.

N et USB. The NBG5615 allows you to connect a USB device (such as printer, or scanner) directly to the USB port and then share that device over the network using the NetUSB utility. NBG5615 Users Guide 15 Chapter 1 Introduction 1.3 Ways to Manage the NBG5615 Use any of the following methods to manage the NBG5615.

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). You can use the WPS button or the WPS section of the Web Configurator to set up a wireless network with your ZyXEL Device.

Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the NBG5615 using a

(supported) web browser. 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG5615 Do the following things regularly to make the NBG5615 more secure and to manage the NBG5615 more effectively.

Change the password. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.

Write down the password and put it in a safe place.

Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the NBG5615 to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the NBG5615. You could simply restore your last configuration. 1.5 Resetting the NBG5615 If you forget your password or IP address, or you cannot access the Web Configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the NBG5615 to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously saved, the password will be reset to 1234 and the IP address will be reset to 192.168.1.1. 1.5.1 How to Use the RESET Button 1 Make sure the power LED is on. 2 3 Press the RESET button for one to four seconds to restart/reboot the NBG5615. Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG5615 back to its factory-default configurations. 1.6 The WPS Button Your NBG5615 supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance. 16 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 1 Introduction WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. You can use the WPS button (

quickly set up a wireless network with strong security.

) on the front panel of the NBG5615 to activate WPS in order to 1 Make sure the power LED is on (not blinking). 2 Press the WPS button for more than three seconds and release it. Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the NBG5615. Note: You must activate WPS in the NBG5615 and in another wireless device within two minutes of each other. For more information on using WPS, see Section 9.2 on page 73. NBG5615 Users Guide 17 Chapter 1 Introduction 1.7 LEDs Figure 1 Front Panel Pow er LAN 1-4 WAN WPS 5G WLAN 2.4G WLAN USB 1/2 The following table describes the LEDs. Table 1 Front panel LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Power Green On The NBG5615 is receiving power and functioning properly. Blinking The NBG5615 is in the process of starting up or default restoring. Off The NBG5615 is not receiving power. WAN Green On The NBG5615s WAN connection is ready. Blinking The NBG5615 is sending/receiving data through the WAN. Off The WAN connection is not ready, or has failed. LAN 1-4 Green On The NBG5615s LAN connection is ready. Blinking The NBG5615 is sending/receiving data through the LAN. Off The LAN connection is not ready, or has failed. 18 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 Front panel LEDs (continued) STATUS LED COLOR 2.4G/5G WLAN Green On DESCRIPTION The NBG5615 is ready and the 2.4GHz/5GHz wireless LAN is on, but is not sending/receiving data through the wireless LAN. Blinking The NBG5615 is sending/receiving data through the wireless LAN. Off The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed. WPS Green On WPS is enabled. Blinking The NBG5615 is negotiating a WPS connection with a wireless client. Off WPS is disabled. USB 1/2 Green On The NBG5615 has a USB device installed. Blinking The NBG5615 is transmitting and/or receiving data from routers through an installed USB device. Off There is no USB device connected to the NBG5615. 1.8 Wall Mounting You may need screw anchors if mounting on a concrete or brick wall. Table 2 Wall Mounting Information Distance between holes M4 Screws Screw anchors (optional) 13 cm Two Two 1 Select a position free of obstructions on a wall strong enough to hold the weight of the device. 2 Mark two holes on the wall at the appropriate distance apart for the screws. Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws. 3 If using screw anchors, drill two holes for the screw anchors into the wall. Push the anchors into the full depth of the holes, then insert the screws into the anchors. Do not insert the screws all the way in - leave a small gap of about 0.5 cm. If not using screw anchors, use a screwdriver to insert the screws into the wall. Do not insert the screws all the way in - leave a gap of about 0.5 cm. 4 Make sure the screws are fastened well enough to hold the weight of the NBG5615 with the connection cables. 5 Align the holes on the back of the NBG5615 with the screws on the wall. Hang the NBG5615 on the screws. NBG5615 Users Guide 19 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 2 Wall Mounting Example 20 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 2 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 2.1 Overview The ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility allows you to work with the USB devices that are connected directly to the NBG5615 as if they are connected directly to your computer. This allows you to easily share USB-based devices such as printers, scanners, MP3 players, faxes, and digital cameras (to name a few) with all the other people in your home or office as long as they are connected to the NBG5615 and have the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility installed. Note: Be sure to install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility (for NetUSB functionality) from the included disc, or download the latest version from the zyxel.com website. 2.1.1 Quick Setup This section shows you how to get started using the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility. 1 2 3 Install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility on each computer connected to the NBG5615. Connect a USB device to the USB port on the NBG5615. Run the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility to display a list of all connected USB devices, then use it to connect your computer to them. 2.1.2 Installing ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Before you can access USB devices connected to the NBG5615, you must first install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility on any computer on your LAN to which you want to allow access to these devices. Note: In order to properly use the utility with your NBG5615, ensure that the NBG5615 firmware is version v1.00(AAGI.0) or higher. See Chapter 24 on page 196 for information on updating your devices firmware. To install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility:

1 2 Insert the disc that came with your NBG5615 into your computers disc drive. Run the Set up program by double-clicking it and then follow the on-screen instructions for installing it on your computer. Note: The following operating systems are supported: Windows XP/Vista/7 (32 and 64-bit versions), and Mac OS X 10.6. NBG5615 Users Guide 21 Chapter 2 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 3 To open the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility, double-click its system tray icon. 2.2 The ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility This section describes the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility main window. Figure 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Main Window The following table describes the icons in this window. Table 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Main Window Icons ICON DESCRIPTION Configure Server Click to open the NBG5615s built-in Web Configurator, which you can use to set up the NBG5615 (see Chapter 4 on page 39 for details). Auto-Connect Printer You can set the selected printer to auto-connect after you have connected it to your computer during inital connection. If the printer is auto-connected to your computer, they will always be connected over the network. You do not need to configure it manually each time. Note: If the computer is connecting to the shared USB printer for the first time, you need to click Connect and setup the printer before you can use the Auto-Connect Printer function. See Chapter 9 on page 84 for more details. Note: You first must install the appropriate drivers for the printer that you intend to use. 22 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 2 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Table 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Main Window Icons (continued) ICON DESCRIPTION Connect Select a USB device and then click this button to connect to it. Your computer can connect to as many USB devices as are connected to the NBG5615. Disconnect Select a device to which your computer is connected and then click this button to disconnect from it. Request to Connect Some USB devices may not allow automatic connections over the network. If so, select the device in question and click this button to issue a request to connect to it. Network Scanner Click this to open the scanner options on your computer for working with a scanner connected to the network. 2.2.1 The Menus This section describes the utilitys menus. Figure 4 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Menus The following table describes the menus in this screen. Table 4 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Main Screen Menus MENU DESCRIPTION ITEM System Tools Exit Configuration Auto-Connect Printer List Help About This closes the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility. This opens the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility configuration window. This opens the list window that displays all of the printing devices connected to the NBG5615. This opens the about window, which provides information of the utility software and driver versions. NBG5615 Users Guide 23 Chapter 2 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Table 4 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Main Screen Menus (continued) MENU DESCRIPTION ITEM Auto-Connect Printer Set Auto-Connect Printer Delete Auto-Connect Printer You can set the selected printer to auto-connect after you have connected it to your computer during inital connection. If the printer is auto-connected to your computer, they will always be connected over the network. You do not need to configure it manually each time. Click this to show your installed printer list and select the one you want to set as auto-connected. Note: If the computer is connecting to the shared USB printer for the first time, you need to click Connect and setup the printer before you can use the Auto-Connect Printer function. See Chapter 9 on page 84 for more details. Note: You first must install the appropriate drivers for the printer that you intend to use. This removes the auto-connect option from the selected printer. 2.2.2 The ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Configuration Window This section describes the utilitys configuration window, which allows you to set certain options for the utility. These options do not apply to the USB devices connected to the NBG5615. You can open it by clicking the Tools > Configurat ion menu command. Figure 5 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Configuration Window 24 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 2 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility The following table describes the labels in this window. Table 5 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Configuration Window LABEL DESCRIPTION Basic Language OK Cancel Apply Select this to run the utility automatically when you log into or start up Windows. Select a language for the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility. You must restart the utility for the change to take effect. Click this to save your changes and close the window. Click this cancel to close the window without saving. Click this to save your changes without closing the window. 2.2.3 The Auto-Connect Printer List Window This section describes the utilitys auto-connect printer list window. You can open it by clicking the Tools > Aut o- Connect Print er List menu command. Note: If the computer is connecting to the shared USB printer for the first time, you need to click Connect and setup the printer before you can use the Aut o- Connect Print er function. See Chapter 9 on page 84 for more details. Figure 6 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Auto-Connect Printer List Window The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 6 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Auto-Connect Printer List Window LABEL DESCRIPTION Server IP & Printer Name Windows Printer Name Displays a list of print server IPs and printer names connected to this NBG5615. Displays a corresponding list of Windows printer names connected to this devices listed in the other list. Delete Close Select an printer from the list and click this to remove it. Click this to close the window. NBG5615 Users Guide 25 Chapter 2 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility 2.2.4 Exit the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility If you want to exit the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility when your computer is not connected to any USB device, follow the steps below:

1 Click Syst em > Exit on the Utility screen. The Utility will automatically close. Or you can close the Utlity screen first, then exit:

1 Click the X on the upper-right corner of the Utility:

2 This will close the Utility screen to an icon at the system tray of your computer. Right-click on the Utilitys icon and click Exit . 26 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 3 Connection Wizard 3.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the wizard setup screens in the Web Configurator. The Web Configurators wizard setup helps you configure your device to access the Internet. Refer to your ISP for your Internet account information. Leave a field blank if you dont have that information. 3.2 Accessing the Wizard Launch your web browser and type "http://192.168.1.1" as the website address. Type "1234"

(default) as the password and click Login. Note: The Wizard appears when the NBG5615 is accessed for the first time or when you reset the NBG5615 to its default factory settings. The Wizard screen opens. Choose your Language and click Connect t o I nt ernet. Figure 7 Welcome NBG5615 Users Guide 27 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 3.3 Connect to Internet The NBG5615 offers three Internet connection types. They are I PoE, PPPoE or PPTP. The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using. Figure 8 Detecting your Internet Connection Type If the wizard does not detect a connection type, you must select one from the drop-down list box. Check with your ISP to make sure you use the correct type. Note: If you get an error message, check your hardware connections. Make sure your Internet connection is up and running. The following screen depends on your Internet connection type. Enter the details provided by your Internet Service Provider (ISP) in the fields (if any). 28 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 9 Internet Connection Type Chapter 3 Connection Wizard Your NBG5615 detects the following Internet Connection type. Table 7 Internet Connection Type CONNECTION TYPE DESCRIPTION IPoE PPPoE PPTP Select the I PoE (IP over Ethernet) option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. Select the PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) option for a dial-up connection. Select the PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) option for a dial-up connection, and your ISP gave you an IP address and/or subnet mask. 3.3.1 Connection Type: IPoE Choose I PoE as the I nt ernet Connect ion Type when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. Click N ext . NBG5615 Users Guide 29 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard Figure 10 Internet Connection Type: IPoE The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 8 Internet Connection Type: IPoE DESCRIPTION LABEL Internet Connection Type Select the I PoE option. Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Select this radio button if your ISP assigned an IP address for your Internet connection. IP Address Subnet Mask Enter the IP address provided by your ISP. Enter the IP subnet mask in this field. Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address in this field. Exit Back Next Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. Note: If you get an error screen after clicking N ext , you might have selected the wrong Internet Connection type. Click Back, make sure your Internet connection is working and select the right Connection Type. Contact your ISP if you are not sure of your Internet Connection type. 3.3.2 Connection Type: PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) functions as a dial-up connection. PPPoE is an IETF

(Internet Engineering Task Force) standard specifying how a host personal computer interacts with a broadband modem (for example DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) to achieve access to high-speed data networks. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for instance, RADIUS). 30 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let end users access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for specific users. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP/carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the subscriber's site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG5615 (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NBG5615 does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LAN's computers will have Internet access. Figure 11 Internet Connection Type: PPPoE The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 9 Internet Connection Type: PPPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION Internet Connection Type Get automatically from ISP Select the PPPoE option for a dial-up connection. Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Use Fixed IP Address Select this radio button, provided by your ISP to give the NBG5615 a fixed, unique IP address. PPP Username Type the user name given to you by your ISP. PPP Password Type the password associated with the user name above. My WAN IP Address Type the name of your service provider. Exit Back Next Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. NBG5615 Users Guide 31 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 3.3.3 Connection Type: PPTP Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables transfers of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks. PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol, and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet. Refer to the appendix for more information on PPTP. The NBG5615 supports one PPTP server connection at any given time. Figure 12 Internet Connection Type: PPTP The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 10 Internet Connection Type: PPTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Internet Connection Type Select PPTP from the drop-down list box. To configure a PPTP client, you must configure the PPTP Usernam e and PPTP Passw ord fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection. Obtain an IP Address Automatically Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Static IP Address Select this radio button if your ISP assigned an IP address for your Internet connection. PPTP Username Type the user name given to you by your ISP. PPTP Password Type the password associated with the User Name above. PPTP Server IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Type the server IP address of the PPTP server. Type the (static) IP address assigned to you by your ISP. Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given). Gateway IP Address Type the gateway IP address of the PPTP server. 32 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard Table 10 Internet Connection Type: PPTP (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Exit Back Next Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. The NBG5615 connects to the Internet. Figure 13 Connecting to the Internet Note: If the Wizard successfully connects to the Internet, it proceeds to the next step. If you get an error message, go back to the previous screen and make sure you have entered the correct information provided by your ISP. 3.4 Router Password Change the login password in the following screen. Enter the new password and retype it to confirm. Click N ext to proceed with the W ireless Securit y screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 33 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard Figure 14 Router Password 3.5 Wireless Security Configure Wireless Settings. Configure the wireless network settings on your NBG5615 in the following screen. The fields that show up depend on the kind of security you select. 3.5.1 Wireless Security: No Security Choose N o Securit y in the Wireless Security screen to let wireless devices within range access your wireless network. 34 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 15 Wireless Security: No Security Chapter 3 Connection Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 11 Wireless Security: No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Radio Choose whether you want to apply the wireless security to 2 .4 G Hz or 5 G Hz wireless radio. Wireless Network Name

(SSID) Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. If you change this field on the NBG5615, make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network. Security Mode Select a security level from the drop-down list box. Choose N o Securit y to have no wireless LAN security configured. If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG5615, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Exit Back Next Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. 3.5.2 Wireless Security: WPA2-PSK Choose W PA2 - PSK security in the Wireless Security screen to set up a password for your wireless network. NBG5615 Users Guide 35 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard Figure 16 Wireless Security: WPA2-PSK The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 12 Wireless Security: WPA2-PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Radio Choose whether you want to apply the wireless security to 2 .4 G Hz or 5 G Hz wireless radio. Wireless Network Name

(SSID) Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. If you change this field on the NBG5615, make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network. Security Mode Select a security level from the drop-down list box. Choose W PA2 - PSK security to configure a Pre-Shared Key. Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA2-PSK. Wireless password Type from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters. You can set up the most secure wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens. Verify Password Retype the password to confirm. Exit Back Next Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Click this to return to the previous screen. Click this to continue. Congratulations! Open a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, to visit your favorite website. Note: If you cannot access the Internet when your computer is connected to one of the NBG5615s LAN ports, check your connections. Then turn the NBG5615 off, wait for a few seconds then turn it back on. If that does not work, log in to the web configurator again and check you have typed all information correctly. See the Users Guide for more suggestions. 36 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 17 Congratulations Chapter 3 Connection Wizard You can also click GO to open the Easy Mode Web Configurator of your NBG5615. You have successfully set up your NBG5615 to operate on your network and access the Internet. You are now ready to connect wirelessly to your NBG5615 and access the Internet. NBG5615 Users Guide 37 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 38 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 4 Introducing the Web Configurator 4.1 Overview This chapter describes how to access the NBG5615 Web Configurator and provides an overview of its screens. The Web Configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy setup and management of the NBG5615 via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions, or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.

JavaScript (enabled by default).

Java permissions (enabled by default). Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter (Chapter 25 on page 203) to see how to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer. 4.2 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your NBG5615 hardware is properly connected and prepare your computer or computer network to connect to the NBG5615 (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 2 3 Launch your web browser. The NBG5615 is in router mode by default. Type "http://192.168.1.1" as the website address. If the NBG5615 is in access point, the IP address is 192.168.1.2. See Chapter 5 on page 43 for more information about the modes of the NBG5615. Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access this website address. 4.2.1 Login Screen Note: If this is the first time you are accessing the Web Configurator, you may be redirected to the Wizard. Refer to Chapter 3 on page 27 for the Connection Wizard screens. The Web Configurator initially displays the following login screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 39 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 18 Login screen The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 13 Login screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Language Password Select the language you want to use to configure the Web Configurator. Click Login. Type "1234" (default) as the password. This shows the current weather, either in celsius or fahrenheit, of the city you specify in Section 4.2.2.1 on page 41. This shows the time (hh:mm:ss) and date (yyyy:mm:dd) of the timezone you select in Section 4.2.2.2 on page 41 or Section 24.5 on page 195. The time is in 24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM. 4.2.2 Password Screen You should see a screen asking you to change your password (highly recommended) as shown next. Figure 19 Change Password Screen 40 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 14 Change Password Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION New Password Type a new password. Retype to Confirm Retype the password for confirmation. Apply Ignore Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click I gnore if you do not want to change the password this time. Note: The management session automatically times out when the time period set in the Adm inist rat or I nact ivit y Tim er field expires (default five minutes; go to Chapter 24 on page 193 to change this). Simply log back into the NBG5615 if this happens. 4.2.2.1 Weather Edit You can change the temperature unit and select the location for which you want to know the weather. Click the icon to change the Weather display. Figure 20 Change Weather The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 15 Change Weather LABEL DESCRIPTION Change Unit Choose which temperature unit you want the NBG5615 to display. Change Location Select the location for which you want to know the weather. If the city you want is not listed, choose one that is closest to it. Finish Click this to apply the settings and refresh the date and time display. 4.2.2.2 Time/Date Edit One timezone can cover more than one country. You can choose a particular country in which the NBG5615 is located and have the NBG5615 display and use the current time and date for its logs. Click the icon to change the time and date display. Figure 21 Change Password Screen NBG5615 Users Guide 41 Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 16 Change Password Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Change time zone Select the specific country whose current time and date you want the NBG5615 to display. Finish Click this to apply the settings and refresh the weather display. Note: You can also edit the timezone in Section 24.5 on page 195. 42 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 5 NBG5615 Modes 5.1 Overview This chapter introduces the different modes available on your NBG5615. First, the term mode refers to two things in this Users Guide.

W eb Configurat or m ode. This refers to the Web Configurator interface you want to use for editing NBG5615 features.

Device m ode. This is the operating mode of your NBG5615, or simply how the NBG5615 is being used in the network. 5.1.1 Web Configurator Modes This refers to the configuration interface of the Web Configurator, which has two modes:

Easy: The Web Configurator shows this mode by default. Refer to Chapter 6 on page 45 for more information on the screens in this mode. This interface may be sufficient for users who just want to use the device.

Expert: Advanced users can change to this mode to customize all the functions of the NBG5615. Click Expert Mode after logging into the Web Configurator. The Users Guide Chapter 4 on page 39 through Chapter 24 on page 201 discusses the screens in this mode. 5.1.2 Device Modes This refers to the operating mode of the NBG5615, which can act as a:

Rout er: This is the default device mode of the NBG5615. Use this mode to connect the local network to another network, like the Internet. Go to Section 7.2 on page 57 to view the St at us screen in this mode.

Access Point : Use this mode if you want to extend your network by allowing network devices to connect to the NBG5615 wirelessly. Go to Section 8.4 on page 67 to view the Stat us screen in this mode. For more information on these modes and to change the mode of your NBG5615, refer to Chapter 24 on page 201. The menu for changing device modes is available in Expert Mode only. Note: Choose your device mode carefully to avoid having to change it later. When changing to another mode, the IP address of the NBG5615 changes. The running applications and services of the network devices connected to the NBG5615 can be interrupted. NBG5615 Users Guide 43 Chapter 5 NBG5615 Modes 44 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 6 Easy Mode 6.1 Overview The Web Configurator is set to Easy Mode by default. You can configure several key features of the NBG5615 in this mode. This mode is useful to users who are not fully familiar with some features that are usually intended for network administrators. When you log in to the Web Configurator, the following screen opens. Figure 22 Easy Mode: Network Map Navigation Panel Network Map Go to Status Screen Control Panel Click St at us to open the following screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 45 Chapter 6 Easy Mode Figure 23 Easy Mode: Status Screen Navigation Panel Go to Network Map Screen Status Screen Control Panel 6.2 What You Can Do You can do the following in this mode:

Use this N avigat ion Panel to opt out of the Easy mode (Section 6.4 on page 46).

Use the N et w ork Map screen to check if your NBG5615 can ping the gateway and whether it is connected to the Internet (Section 6.5 on page 47).

Use the Cont rol Panel to configure and enable NBG5615 features, including wireless security, wireless scheduling and bandwidth management and so on (Section 6.6 on page 48).

Use the St at us Screen to view read-only information about the NBG5615, including the WAN IP, MAC address of the NBG5615 and the firmware version (Section 6.7 on page 54). 6.3 What You Need to Know Between the different device modes, the Cont rol Panel (Section 6.6 on page 48) changes depending on which features are applicable to the mode:

Rout er Mode: All Cont rol Panel features are available.

Access Point Mode: Only Pow er Saving and W ireless Securit y are available. 6.4 Navigation Panel Use this navigation panel to opt out of the Easy mode. 46 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 24 Control Panel Chapter 6 Easy Mode The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 17 Control Panel ITEM DESCRIPTION Home Expert Mode Logout Click this to go to the Login page. Click this to change to Expert Mode and customize features of the NBG5615. Click this to end the Web Configurator session. 6.5 Network Map Note: The Network MAP is viewable by Windows XP (need to install patch), Windows Vista and Windows 7 users only. For Windows XP (Service Pack 2) users, you can see the network devices connected to the NBG5615 by downloading the LLTD (Link Layer Topology Discovery) patch from the Microsoft Website. Note: Dont worry if the Network Map does not display in your web browser. This feature may not be supported by your system. You can still configure the Control Panel

(Section 6.6 on page 48) in the Easy Mode and the NBG5615 features that you want to use in the Expert Mode. When you log into the Web Configurator, the Network Map is shown as follows. Figure 25 Network Map NBG5615 Users Guide 47 Chapter 6 Easy Mode The line connecting the NBG5615 to the gateway becomes green when the NBG5615 is able to ping the gateway. It becomes red when the ping initiating from the NBG5615 does not get a response from the gateway. The same rule applies to the line connecting the gateway to the Internet. You can also view the devices (represented by icons indicating the kind of network device) connected to the NBG5615, including those connecting wirelessly. Right-click on the NBG5615 icon to refresh the network map and go to the Wizard. Right click on the other icons to view information about the device. 6.6 Control Panel The features configurable in Easy Mode are shown in the Cont rol Panel. Figure 26 Control Panel Switch ON to enable the feature. Otherwise, switch OFF. If the feature is turned on, the green light flashes. If it is turned off, the red light flashes. Additionally, click the feature to open a screen where you can edit its settings. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 18 Control Panel ITEM Game Engine DESCRIPTION Switch ON to maximize bandwidth for gaming traffic in your network. Otherwise, switch OFF. Power Saving Click this to schedule the wireless feature of the NBG5615. Refer to Section 6.6.1 on page 49 to see this screen. Disabling the wireless function helps lower the energy consumption of the NBG5615. Switch ON to apply wireless scheduling. Otherwise, switch OFF. Refer to Section 6.6.2 on page 49 to see this screen. Content Filter Click this to restrict access to certain websites, based on keywords contained in URLs, to which you do not want users in your network to open. Switch ON to apply website filtering. Otherwise, switch OFF. Refer to Section 6.6.3 on page 50 to see this screen. Bandwidth MGMT Click this to edit bandwidth management for predefined applications. Switch ON to have the NBG5615 management bandwidth for uplink and downlink traffic according to an application or service. Otherwise, switch OFF. Refer to Section 6.6.4 on page 51 to see this screen. 48 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 6 Easy Mode Table 18 Control Panel (continued) ITEM DESCRIPTION Firewall Switch ON to ensure that your network is protected from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. Otherwise, switch OFF. Refer to Section 6.6.5 on page 52 to see this screen. Wireless Security Click this to configure the wireless security, such as SSID, security mode and WPS key on your NBG5615. Refer to Section 6.6.6 on page 52 to see this screen. 6.6.1 Game Engine When this feature is enabled, the NBG5615 maximizes the bandwidth for gaming traffic that it forwards out through an interface. Figure 27 Game Engine Note: When this is switched on, the Gam e Console tab in the Bandw idt h Mgm t screen is automatically positioned on top. Turn this off if your network is not using gaming. Click OK to close this screen. 6.6.2 Power Saving Use this screen to set the day of the week and time of the day when your wireless LAN is turned on and off. Wireless LAN scheduling is disabled by default. Disabling the wireless capability lowers the energy consumption of the of the NBG5615. NBG5615 Users Guide 49 Chapter 6 Easy Mode Figure 28 Power Saving The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 19 Power Saving LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Radio WLAN Status Choose whether you want to apply the power saving schedule to 2 .4 G Hz or 5 G H z wireless radio. Select On or Off to specify whether the Wireless LAN is turned on or off (depending on what you selected in the W LAN St at us field). This field works in conjunction with the Day and For the follow ing t im es fields. Day Select Everyday or the specific days to turn the Wireless LAN on or off. If you select Everyday you can not select any specific days. This field works in conjunction with the For t he follow ing t im es field. For the following times (24-Hour Format) Select a begin time using the first set of hour and minute (m in) drop down boxes and select an end time using the second set of hour and minute (m in) drop down boxes. If you have chosen On earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn on between the two times you enter in these fields. If you have chosen Off earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn off between the two times you enter in these fields. In this time format, midnight is 00:00 and progresses up to 24:00. For example, 6:00 PM is 18:00. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to close this screen without saving any changes. 6.6.3 Content Filter Use this screen to restrict access to certain websites, based on keywords contained in URLs, to which you do not want users in your network to open. 50 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 29 Content Filter Chapter 6 Easy Mode The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 20 Content Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add after you have typed a keyword. Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed. Note: The NBG5615 does not recognize wildcard characters as keywords. Delete Apply Cancel When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request. Highlight a keyword in the text box and click Delet e to remove it. The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to close this screen without saving any changes. 6.6.4 Bandwidth MGMT Use this screen to set bandwidth allocation to pre-defined services and applications for bandwidth allocation. The NBG5615 uses bandwidth management for incoming and outgoing traffic. Rank the services and applications by dragging them accordingly from High to Low and click Apply. Click Cancel to close the screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 51 Chapter 6 Easy Mode Figure 30 Bandwidth MGNT Use your mouse to drag the items according to how you want to prioritize them. Left-click and slide up or down. 6.6.5 Firewall Enable this feature to protect the network from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. The NBG5615 blocks repetitive pings from the WAN that can otherwise cause systems to slow down or hang. Figure 31 Firewall Click OK to close this screen. 6.6.6 Wireless Security Use this screen to configure security for your the wireless LAN. You can enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode in the following screen. Note: You can enable the wireless function of your NBG5615 by first turning on the switch in the back panel. 52 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 32 Wireless Security Chapter 6 Easy Mode The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen. Table 21 Wireless Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Radio Choose whether you want to apply the wireless security to 2 .4 G Hz or 5 G Hz wireless radio. Wireless Network Name

(SSID) Security mode

(Service Set IDentity) The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a wireless station is associated. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Select W PA2 - PSK to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as this device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Wireless password Select N o Securit y to allow any client to connect to this network without authentication. This field appears when you choose wither W PA2 - PSK as the security mode. Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive keyboard characters. Verify password Type the password again to confirm. Apply Cancel WPS Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to close this screen. Click this to configure the WPS screen. You can transfer the wireless settings configured here (W ireless Securit y screen) to another wireless device that supports WPS. 6.6.7 WPS Use this screen to add a wireless station to the network using WPS. Click W PS in the W ireless Securit y to open the following screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 53 Chapter 6 Easy Mode Figure 33 Wireless Security: WPS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 22 Wireless Security: WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Security Click this to go back to the W ireless Securit y screen. WPS Create a secure wireless network simply by pressing a button. The NBG5615 scans for a WPS-enabled device within the range and performs wireless security information synchronization. Note: After you click the WPS button on this screen, you have to press a similar button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes. To add the second wireless station, you have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the first 2 minutes. Register Create a secure wireless network simply by entering a wireless client's PIN (Personal Identification Number) in the NBG5615s interface and pushing this button. Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless stations utility. Then click Regist er to associate to each other and perform the wireless security information synchronization. Exit Click Exit to close this screen. 6.7 Status Screen in Easy Mode In the Network Map screen, click St at us to view read-only information about the NBG5615. 54 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 34 Status Screen in Easy Mode Chapter 6 Easy Mode The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 23 Status Screen in Easy Mode DESCRIPTION ITEM Name Time This is the name of the NBG5615 in the network. You can change this in the Maint enance > General screen in Section 24.3 on page 193. This is the current system date and time. The date is in YYYY:MM:DD (Year-Month-Day) format. The time is in HH:MM:SS

(Hour:Minutes:Seconds) format. WAN IP MAC Address This is the IP address of the WAN port. This is the MAC address of the NBG5615. Firmware Version This shows the firmware version of the NBG5615. The firmware version format shows the trunk version, model code and release number. Wireless 2.4G Network Name (SSID) This shows the SSID of the wireless network. You can configure this in the Wireless Security screen (Section 6.6.6 on page 52; Section 12.2 on page 110). Wireless 5G Network Name (SSID) Security This shows the wireless security used by the NBG5615. NBG5615 Users Guide 55 Chapter 6 Easy Mode 56 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 7 Router Mode 7.1 Overview The NBG5615 is set to router mode by default. Routers are used to connect the local network to another network (for example, the Internet). In the figure below, the NBG5615 connects the local network (LAN 1 ~ LAN 4 ) to the Internet. Figure 35 NBG5615 Network Modem Note: The St at us screen is shown after changing to the Ex pert Mode of the Web Configurator. It varies depending on the device mode of your NBG5615. 7.2 Router Mode Status Screen Click to open the status screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 57 Chapter 7 Router Mode Figure 36 Status Screen: Router Mode The following table describes the icons shown in the St at us screen. Table 24 Status Screen Icon Key ICON DESCRIPTION Logout Click this at any time to exit the Web Configurator. Click this icon to view copyright and a link for related product information. Click this icon to go to Easy Mode. See Chapter 6 on page 45. Select a number of seconds or N one from the drop-down list box to refresh all screen statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen statistics. Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics. 58 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 7 Router Mode Table 24 Status Screen Icon Key (continued) ICON DESCRIPTION Click this icon to see the St atus page. The information in this screen depends on the device mode you select. Click this icon to see the M onitor navigation menu. Click this icon to see the Configurat ion navigation menu. Click this icon to see the M aint enance navigation menu. The following table describes the labels shown in the St at us screen. Table 25 Status Screen: Router Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Device Information Host Name Model Number Firmware Version Sys OP Mode WAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway LAN Information MAC Address IP Address This is the Syst em N am e you enter in the Maint enance > General screen. It is for identification purposes. This is the model name of your device. This is the firmware version and the date created. This is the device mode (Section 5.1.2 on page 43) to which the NBG5615 is set - Rout er Mode. This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device. This shows the WAN ports IP address. This shows the WAN ports subnet mask. This shows the WAN ports gateway IP address. This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device. This shows the LAN ports IP address. IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN ports subnet mask. DHCP This shows the LAN ports DHCP role - Server or Disable. WLAN 2.4G Information WLAN OP Mode This is the device mode (Section 5.1.2 on page 43) to which the NBG5615s wireless LAN is set - Access Point Mode. MAC Address This shows the 2.4GHz wireless adapter MAC Address of your device. SSID Channel Security WLAN 5G Information This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG5615 in the 2.4GHz wireless LAN. This shows the channel number which you select manually. This shows the level of wireless security the NBG5615 is using. MAC Address This shows the 5GHz wireless adapter MAC Address of your device. SSID Channel Security Firewall Summary This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG5615 in the 5GHz wireless LAN. This shows the channel number which you select manually. This shows the level of wireless security the NBG5615 is using. This shows whether the firewall is enabled or not. NBG5615 Users Guide 59 Chapter 7 Router Mode Table 25 Status Screen: Router Mode (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Packet Statistics WLAN 2.4G Station Status WLAN 5G Station Status Click Det ails... to go to the Monit or > Packet St at istics screen (Section 10.5 on page 91). Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics. Click Det ails... to go to the Monit or > W LAN 2 .4 G Stat ion St at us screen (Section 10.6 on page 92). Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG5615s 2.4GHz wireless LAN. Click Det ails... to go to the Monit or > W LAN 5 G Stat ion St at us screen (Section 10.6 on page 92). Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG5615s 5GHz wireless LAN. System Status Item Data This column shows the type of data the NBG5615 is recording. This column shows the actual data recorded by the NBG5615. System Up Time This is the total time the NBG5615 has been on. Current Date/Time This field displays your NBG5615s present date and time. System Resource

- CPU Usage This displays what percentage of the NBG5615s processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG5615 is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using bandwidth management.)

- Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG5615 is using. Interface Status Interface Status This displays the NBG5615 port types. The port types are: W AN , LAN and W LAN . For the LAN and WAN ports, this field displays Dow n (line is down) or Up (line is up or connected). For the 2.4GHz/5GHz WLAN, it displays Up when the 2.4GHz/5GHz WLAN is enabled or Dow n when the 2.4G/5G WLAN is disabled. Rate For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N / A when the line is disconnected. For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if youre using Ethernet encapsulation. This field displays N / A when the line is disconnected. For the 2.4GHz/5GHz WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the 2.4GHz/

5GHz WLAN is enabled and N / A when the WLAN is disabled. 7.2.1 Navigation Panel Use the sub-menus on the navigation panel to configure NBG5615 features. 60 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 37 Navigation Panel: Router Mode Chapter 7 Router Mode The following table describes the sub-menus. Table 26 Navigation Panel: Router Mode LINK FUNCTION TAB Status M ON I TOR Log DHCP Table This screen shows the NBG5615s general device, system and interface status information. Use this screen to access the wizard, and summary statistics tables. Use this screen to view the list of activities recorded by your NBG5615. Use this screen to view current DHCP client information. Packet Statistics Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics. WLAN 2.4G Station Status WLAN 5G Station Status CON FI GURATI ON Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG5615s 2.4GHz wireless LAN. Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG5615s 5GHz wireless LAN. Network WAN Internet Connection This screen allows you to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, DNS servers and the WAN MAC address. Advanced Use this screen to configure other advanced properties. NBG5615 Users Guide 61 Chapter 7 Router Mode Table 26 Navigation Panel: Router Mode (continued) LINK FUNCTION TAB Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G General Use this screen to enable the wireless LAN and configure wireless LAN and wireless security settings. More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the NBG5615. MAC Filter Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG5615 to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the NBG5615. Advanced This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings. QoS Use this screen to configure Wi-Fi Multimedia Quality of Service (WMM QoS). WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services. WPS Use this screen to configure WPS. WPS Station Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS. Scheduling Use this screen to schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled. LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask. IP Alias Use this screen to have the NBG5615 apply IP alias to create LAN subnets. DHCP Server General Use this screen to enable the NBG5615s DHCP server. Advanced Use this screen to assign IP addresses to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses and to have DNS servers assigned by the DHCP server. Client List Use this screen to view information related to your DHCP status. NAT General Use this screen to enable NAT. Port Forwarding Use this screen to configure servers behind the NBG5615 and forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. Port Trigger Use this screen to change your NBG5615s port triggering settings. Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS. Static Route Static Route Use this screen to configure IP static routes. Security Firewall Content Filter Management General Services Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall. This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules, and allows you to edit/

add a firewall rule. Content Filter Use this screen to block certain web features and sites containing certain keywords in the URL. Bandwidth Management General Advanced Use this screen to enable bandwidth management. Use this screen to set the upstream bandwidth and edit a bandwidth management rule. Remote Management WWW Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the NBG5615. Telnet Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the NBG5615. Wake On LAN Use this screen to enable Wake on LAN to remotely turn on a device on the local network. UPnP General Use this screen to enable UPnP on the NBG5615. 62 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 7 Router Mode Table 26 Navigation Panel: Router Mode (continued) LINK FUNCTION TAB USB Media Sharing DLNA Use this screen to have the NBG5615 function as a DLNA-compliant media server, that lets DLNA-compliant media clients play video, audio, and photo content files stored on the connected USB storage device. SAMBA FTP Use this screen to enable file sharing through the NBG5615. Use this screen to have the NBG5615 act as a FTP server. MAI N TEN AN CE General General Password Password Setup Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as system and domain names. Use this screen to change the password of your NBG5615. Time Time Setting Use this screen to change your NBG5615s time and date. Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Backup/

Restore Restart Backup/

Restore System Restart Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG5615. Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your NBG5615. This screen allows you to reboot the NBG5615 without turning the power off. Language Language This screen allows you to select the language you prefer. Sys OP Mode Sys OP Mode This screen allows you to select whether your device acts as a router, or an access point. NBG5615 Users Guide 63 Chapter 7 Router Mode 64 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 8 Access Point Mode 8.1 Overview Use your NBG5615 as an access point (AP) if you already have a router or gateway on your network. In this mode your NBG5615 bridges a wired network (LAN) and wireless LAN (WLAN) in the same subnet. See the figure below for an example. Figure 38 Wireless Internet Access in Access Point Mode Many screens that are available in Rout er Mode are not available in Access Point Mode, such as bandwidth management and firewall. Note: See Chapter 9 on page 73 for an example of setting up a wireless network in Access Point mode. 8.2 What You Can Do

Use the St at us screen to view read-only information about your NBG5615 (Section 8.4 on page 67).

Use the LAN screen to set the IP address for your NBG5615 acting as an access point (Section 8.5 on page 69). 8.3 What You Need to Know See Chapter 9 on page 73 for a tutorial on setting up a network with the NBG5615 as an access point. NBG5615 Users Guide 65 Chapter 8 Access Point Mode 8.3.1 Setting your NBG5615 to AP Mode 1 2 Log into the Web Configurator if you havent already. See the Quick start Guide for instructions on how to do this. To use your NBG5615 as an access point, go to Maint enance > Sys OP Mode and select Access Point Mode. Figure 39 Changing to Access Point mode Note: You have to log in to the Web Configurator again when you change modes. As soon as you do, your NBG5615 is already in Access Point mode. 3 When you select Access Point Mode, the following pop-up message window appears. Figure 40 Pop up for Access Point mode Click OK. Then click Apply. The Web Configurator refreshes once the change to Access Point mode is successful. 8.3.2 Accessing the Web Configurator in Access Point Mode Log in to the Web Configurator in Access Point mode, do the following:

1 2 3 4 66 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG5615. The default IP address of the NBG5615 is 192.168.1.2. In this case, your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192.168.1.3 and 192.168.1.254. Click St art > Run on your computer in Windows. Type cmd in the dialog box. Enter ipconfig to show your computers IP address. If your computers IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix B on page 221 for information on changing your computers IP address. After youve set your computers IP address, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type 192.168.1.2 as the web address in your web browser. NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 8 Access Point Mode Note: After clicking Login, the Easy Mode appears. Refer to Section on page 45 for the Easy Mode screens. Change to Expert Mode to see the screens described in the sections following this. 8.3.3 Configuring your WLAN and Maintenance Settings The configuration of wireless and maintenance settings in Access Point Mode is the same as for Rout er Mode.

See Chapter 12 on page 105 for information on the configuring your wireless network.

See Chapter 24 on page 193 for information on configuring your Maintenance settings. 8.4 AP Mode Status Screen Click to open the St at us screen. Figure 41 Status Screen: Access Point Mode NBG5615 Users Guide 67 Chapter 8 Access Point Mode The following table describes the labels shown in the St at us screen. Table 27 Status Screen: Access Point Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Device Information Host Name Model Number Firmware Version Sys OP Mode LAN Information MAC Address IP Address This is the Syst em N am e you enter in the Maint enance > General screen. It is for identification purposes. This is the model name of your device. This is the firmware version and the date created. This is the device mode (Section 5.1.2 on page 43) to which the NBG5615 is set - AP Mode. This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device. This shows the LAN ports IP address. IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN ports subnet mask. DHCP This shows the LAN ports DHCP role - Client or N one. WLAN 2.4G Information WLAN OP Mode This is the device mode (Section 5.1.2 on page 43) to which the NBG5615s wireless LAN is set - Access Point Mode. MAC Address This shows the 2.4GHz wireless adapter MAC Address of your device. SSID Channel Security WLAN 5G Information This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG5615 in the 2.4GHz wireless LAN. This shows the channel number which you select manually. This shows the level of wireless security the NBG5615 is using. MAC Address This shows the 5GHz wireless adapter MAC Address of your device. SSID Channel Security Summary This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG5615 in the 5GHz wireless LAN. This shows the channel number which you select manually. This shows the level of wireless security the NBG5615 is using. Packet Statistics WLAN 2.4G Station Status WLAN 5G Station Status Click Det ails... to go to the Monit or > Packet St at istics screen (Section 10.5 on page 91). Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics. Click Det ails... to go to the Monit or > W LAN 2 .4 G Stat ion St at us screen (Section 10.6 on page 92). Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG5615s 2.4GHz wireless LAN. Click Det ails... to go to the Monit or > W LAN 5 G Stat ion St at us screen (Section 10.6 on page 92). Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG5615s 5GHz wireless LAN. System Status Item Data This column shows the type of data the NBG5615 is recording. This column shows the actual data recorded by the NBG5615. System Up Time This is the total time the NBG5615 has been on. Current Date/Time This field displays your NBG5615s present date and time. System Resource

- CPU Usage This displays what percentage of the NBG5615s processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG5615 is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using bandwidth management.)

- Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG5615 is using. 68 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 8 Access Point Mode Table 27 Status Screen: Access Point Mode (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface Status Interface Status This displays the NBG5615 port types. The port types are: LAN and W LAN . For the LAN ports, this field displays Dow n (line is down) or Up (line is up or connected). For the 2.4GHz/5GHz WLAN, it displays Up when the 2.4GHz/5GHz WLAN is enabled or Dow n when the 2.4G/5G WLAN is disabled. Rate For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N / A when the line is disconnected. For the 2.4GHz/5GHz WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the 2.4GHz/

5GHz WLAN is enabled and N / A when the WLAN is disabled. 8.4.1 Navigation Panel Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG5615 features in Access Point Mode. Figure 42 Menu: Access Point Mode Refer to Table 26 on page 61 for descriptions of the labels shown in the navigation panel. 8.5 LAN Screen Use this section to configure your LAN settings while in Access Point Mode. Click N et w ork > LAN to see the screen below. Note: If you change the IP address of the NBG5615 in the screen below, you will need to log into the NBG5615 again using the new IP address. NBG5615 Users Guide 69 Chapter 8 Access Point Mode Figure 43 Network > LAN > IP The table below describes the labels in the screen. Table 28 Network > LAN > IP LABEL DESCRIPTION Obtain an IP Address Automatically When you enable this, the NBG5615 gets its IP address from the networks DHCP server (for example, your ISP). Users connected to the NBG5615 can now access the network (i.e., the Internet if the IP address is given by the ISP). Static IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address DNS Assignment First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server The Web Configurator may no longer be accessible unless you know the IP address assigned by the DHCP server to the NBG5615. You need to reset the NBG5615 to be able to access the Web Configurator again (see Section 24.7 on page 198 for details on how to reset the NBG5615). Also when you select this, you cannot enter an IP address for your NBG5615 in the field below. Click this if you want to specify the IP address of your NBG5615. Or if your ISP or network administrator gave you a static IP address to access the network or the Internet. Type the IP address in dotted decimal notation. The default setting is 192.168.1.2. If you change the IP address you will have to log in again with the new IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG5615 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG5615. Enter a Gat ew ay I P Address (if your ISP or network administrator gave you one) in this field. Select Obt ained From I SP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information

(and the NBG5615's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-

only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User- Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User- Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User- Defined changes to N one after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User- Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User- Defined changes to N one after you click Apply. Select N one if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. 70 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 8 Access Point Mode Table 28 Network > LAN > IP (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 71 Chapter 8 Access Point Mode 72 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 9 Tutorials 9.1 Overview This chapter provides tutorials for setting up your NBG5615.

Set Up a Wireless Network with WPS

Configure Wireless Security without WPS

Using Multiple SSIDs on the NBG5615

Automatically Connecting to a USB Printer 9.2 Set Up a Wireless Network with WPS This section gives you an example of how to set up wireless network using WPS. This example uses the NBG5615 as the AP and NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to a notebook. Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter or PCI card). There are two WPS methods for creating a secure connection. This tutorial shows you how to do both.

Push But t on Configurat ion ( PBC) - create a secure wireless network simply by pressing a button. See Section 9.2.1 on page 73.This is the easier method.

PI N Configurat ion - create a secure wireless network simply by entering a wireless client's PIN

(Personal Identification Number) in the NBG5615s interface. See Section 9.2.2 on page 74. This is the more secure method, since one device can authenticate the other. 9.2.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC) 1 Make sure that your NBG5615 is turned on. Make sure the W I FI button (at the back panel of the NBG5615) is pushed in, and that the device is placed within range of your notebook. 2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client (this example uses the NWD210N) driver and utility in your notebook. 3 4 In the wireless client utility, find the WPS settings. Enable WPS and press the WPS button (St art or W PS button) Log into NBG5615s Web Configurator and press the Push But t on in the Configurat ion >

N et w ork > W ireless LAN 2 .4 G > W PS St at ion screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 73 Chapter 9 Tutorials Note: Your NBG5615 has a WPS button located on its panel, as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function; you can use one or the other. Note: It doesnt matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one. The NBG5615 sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG5615 securely. The following figure shows you an example to set up wireless network and security by pressing a button on both NBG5615 and wireless client (the NWD210N in this example). Figure 44 Example WPS Process: PBC Method Wireless Client Access Point WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION 9.2.2 PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both NBG5615s configuration interface and the clients utilities. Launch your wireless clients configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number. Enter the PIN number to the PI N field in the Configurat ion > N et w ork > W ireless LAN 2 .4 G >

W PS St at ion screen on the NBG5615. NBG5615 Users Guide 1 2 74 Chapter 9 Tutorials 3 Click St art buttons (or button next to the PIN field) on both the wireless client utility screen and the NBG5615s W PS St at ion screen within two minutes. The NBG5615 authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG5615 securely. The following figure shows you the example to set up wireless network and security on NBG5615 and wireless client (ex. NWD210N in this example) by using PIN method. Figure 45 Example WPS Process: PIN Method Wireless Client Access Point WITHIN 2 MINUTES 9.3 Configure Wireless Security without WPS This example shows you how to configure wireless security settings with the following parameters on your NBG5615. SSI D Channel Securit y SSID_Example3 6 WPA2-PSK

(Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey) Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your NBG5615. NBG5615 Users Guide 75 Chapter 9 Tutorials The instructions require that your hardware is connected (see the Quick Start Guide) and you are logged into the Web Configurator through your LAN connection (see Section 4.2 on page 39). 1 Make sure the W I FI switch (at the back panel of the NBG5615) is set to ON . 2 Open the Configurat ion > N et w ork > W ireless LAN 2 .4 G > General screen in the APs Web Configurator. 3 4 Confirm that the wireless LAN is enabled on the NBG5615. Enter SSI D_ Exam ple3 as the SSID and select Channel- 0 6 as the channel. Set security mode to W PA2 - PSK and enter Thisism yW PA- PSKpre- sharedkey in the Pre- Shared Key field. Click Apply. 76 NBG5615 Users Guide 5 Open the St at us screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device I nform at ion and check if the WLAN connection is up under I nt erface St at us. Chapter 9 Tutorials 9.3.1 Configure Your Notebook Note: We use the ZyXEL NWD2205 wireless adapter utility screens as an example for the wireless client. The screens may vary for different models. 1 The NBG5615 supports IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and IEEE 802.11n wireless clients. Make sure that your notebook or computers wireless adapter supports one of these standards. 2 Wireless adapters come with software sometimes called a utility that you install on your computer. See your wireless adapters Users Guide for information on how to do that. NBG5615 Users Guide 77 Chapter 9 Tutorials 3 After youve installed the utility, open it. If you cannot see your utilitys icon on your screen, go to St art > Program s and click on your utility in the list of programs that appears. The utility displays a list of APs within range, as shown in the example screen below. 4 Select SSID_Example3 and click Connect . 5 Select AES and type the security key in the following screen. Click N ext . 6 The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to continue. 78 NBG5615 Users Guide 7 Check the status of your wireless connection in the screen below. If your wireless connection is weak or you have no connection, see the Troubleshooting section of this Users Guide. Chapter 9 Tutorials If your connection is successful, open your Internet browser and enter http://www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar. If you are able to access the web site, your wireless connection is successfully configured. 9.4 Using Multiple SSIDs on the NBG5615 You can configure more than one SSID on a NBG5615. See Section 12.4 on page 118. This allows you to configure multiple independent wireless networks on the NBG5615 as if there were multiple APs (virtual APs). Each virtual AP has its own SSID, wireless security type and MAC filtering settings. That is, each SSID on the NBG5615 represents a different access point/wireless network to wireless clients in the network. Clients can associate only with the SSIDs for which they have the correct security settings. Clients using different SSIDs can access the Internet and the wired network behind the NBG5615 (such as a printer). NBG5615 Users Guide 79 Chapter 9 Tutorials For example, you may set up three wireless networks (A, B and C) in your office. A is for workers, B is for guests and C is specific to a VoIP device in the meeting room. A SSI D_ W orker C SSI D_ VoI P B SSI D_ Guest 9.4.1 Configuring Security Settings of Multiple SSIDs The NBG5615 is in router mode by default. This example shows you how to configure the SSIDs with the following parameters on your NBG5615 (in router mode). SSID SECURITY TYPE KEY MAC FILTERING SSID_Worker WPA2-PSK DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork Disable WPA Compatible SSID_VoIP WPA-PSK VoIPOnly12345678 Allow SSID_Guest WPA-PSK keyexample123 Disable 00:A0:C5:01:23:45 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG5615 using an Ethernet cable. The default IP address of the NBG5615 in router mode is 192.168.1.1. In this case, your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192.168.1.2 and 192.168.1.254. Click St art > Run on your computer in Windows. Type cmd in the dialog box. Enter ipconfig to show your computers IP address. If your computers IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix B on page 221 for information on changing your computers IP address. After youve set your computers IP address, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type http://192.168.1.1 as the web address in your web browser. Enter 1234 (default) as the password and click Login. NBG5615 Users Guide 1 2 3 4 5 80 6 7 Type a new password and retype it to confirm, then click Apply. Otherwise, click I gnore. The Easy Mode appears. Click Expert Mode in the navigation panel. 8 Go to Configurat ion > N et w ork > W ireless LAN 2 .4 G > More AP. Click the Edit icon of the first entry to configure wireless and security settings for SSI D_ W orker. Chapter 9 Tutorials 9 Configure the screen as follows. In this example, you enable I nt ra- BSS Traffic for SSI D_ W orker to allow wireless clients in the same wireless network to communicate with each other. Click Apply. 10 Click the Edit icon of the second entry to configure wireless and security settings for SSI D_ VoI P. NBG5615 Users Guide 81 Chapter 9 Tutorials 11 Configure the screen as follows. You do not enable I nt ra- BSS Traffic for SSI D_ VoI P. Click Apply. 12 Click the Edit icon of the third entry to configure wireless and security settings for SSI D_ Guest . 13 Configure the screen as follows. In this example, you enable I nt ra- BSS Traffic for SSI D_ Guest to allow wireless clients in the same wireless network to communicate with each other. Select Enable Guest W LAN to allow clients to access the Internet only. Click Apply. 82 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 9 Tutorials 14 Click the MAC Filt er tab to configure MAC filtering for the SSI D_ VoI P wireless network. Select SSI D_ VoI P from the SSI D Select drop-down list, enable MAC address filtering and set the Filt er Act ion to Allow . Enter the VoIP devices MAC address in the Mac Address field and click Apply to allow only the VoIP device to associate with the NBG5615 using this SSID. NBG5615 Users Guide 83 Chapter 9 Tutorials 9.5 Automatically Connecting to a USB Printer Your computer can connect to a shared USB printer by using the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility. This tutorial shows you how to set your computer to automatically connect to a shared USB printer over your NBG5615 network each time you log into your computer. 1 2 Install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility to your computer which should be connected to the NBG5615s network. See Chapter 2 on page 22 for details on the installation. Connect a USB printer to one of the USB ports of the NBG5615. 3 Open the ZyXEL N et USB Sharing Cent er Ut ilit y on your computer. The name of the USB printer automatically shows in the Utility screen. 84 NBG5615 Users Guide 4 Click on the printer name. Then click Connect . Your computer will search for the printer driver. You may be prompted to install the driver. Follow the drivers installation steps to finish installing. Chapter 9 Tutorials 5 Click the Aut o- Connect Print er menu and select Set Aut o- Connect Print er from the menu. 6 Select the USB printer you want to connect to and click Apply. NBG5615 Users Guide 85 Chapter 9 Tutorials 7 Now your computer can automatically connect to this shared USB printer over your NBG5615 network each time you log into your computer. The printer will be automatically added to your printer list. 8 The Utility supports one connection to the NBG5615s USB device at a time. If more than one computer is using the printer and are all auto-connected to the USB device, the second computer automatically starts printing after the first computer finishes its printing task. 86 NBG5615 Users Guide PART II Technical Reference 87 88 C HAPTER 10 Monitor 10.1 Overview This chapter discusses read-only information related to the device state of the NBG5615. To access the Monitor screens, go to Expert Mode after login, then click

. You can also click the links in the Sum m ary table of the St at us screen to view the packets sent/

received as well as the status of clients connected to the NBG5615. 10.2 What You Can Do

Use the Log screen to see the logs for the activity on the NBG5615 (Section 10.3 on page 89).

Use the DHCP Table screen to view information related to your DHCP status (Section 10.4 on page 90).

use the Packet St at ist ics screen to view port status, packet specific statistics, the "system up time" and so on (Section 10.5 on page 91).

Use the W LAN 2 .4 G/ 5 G St at ion St at us screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG5615 (Section 10.6 on page 92). 10.3 The Log Screen The Web Configurator allows you to look at all of the NBG5615s logs in one location. 10.3.1 View Log Use the View Log screen to see the logged messages for the NBG5615. The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills. Select what logs you want to see from the Display drop list. The log choices depend on your settings in the Log Set t ing screen. Click Refresh to renew the log screen. Click Clear Log to delete all the logs. NBG5615 Users Guide 89 Chapter 10 Monitor Figure 46 View Log You can configure which logs to display in the View Log screen. Go to the Log Set t ing screen and select the logs you wish to display. Click Apply to save your settings. Click Cancel to start the screen afresh. Figure 47 Log Settings 10.4 DHCP Table DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NBG5615s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NBG5615 provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on that network, or else the computer must be manually configured. Click Monit or > DHCP Table or Configurat ion > N et w ork > DHCP Server > Client List . Read-

only information here relates to your DHCP status. The DHCP table shows current DHCP client 90 NBG5615 Users Guide information (including MAC Address, and I P Address) of all network clients using the NBG5615s DHCP server. Figure 48 Monitor > DHCP Table Chapter 10 Monitor The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 29 Monitor > DHCP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION

Status Host Name IP Address This is the index number of the host computer. This field displays whether the connection to the host computer is up (a yellow bulb) or down (a gray bulb). This field displays the computer host name. This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. MAC Address This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host N am e field. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address which uniquely identifies a device. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Select this if you want to reserve the IP address for this specific MAC address. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Reserve Apply Cancel 10.5 Packet Statistics Click Monit or > Packet St at ist ics or the Packet St at ist ics ( Det ails...) hyperlink in the St at us screen. Read-only information here includes port status, packet specific statistics and the "system up time". The Poll I nt erval( s) field is configurable and is used for refreshing the screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 91 Chapter 10 Monitor Figure 49 Monitor > Packet Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 30 Monitor > Packet Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Status TxPkts RxPkts Collisions Tx B/s Rx B/s Up Time This is the NBG5615s interface type. For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or Dow n when the line is disconnected. For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if youre using Ethernet encapsulation and I dle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop

(dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation. This field displays Dow n when the line is disconnected. For the 2.4GHz or 5GHz WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and Dow n when the WLAN is disabled. This is the number of transmitted packets on this port. This is the number of received packets on this port. This is the number of collisions on this port. This displays the transmission speed in bytes per second on this port. This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this port. This is the total time the NBG5615 has been for each session. System Up Time This is the total time the NBG5615 has been on. Poll Interval(s) Enter the time interval in seconds for refreshing statistics in this field. Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll I nt erval( s) field. Stop Click St op to stop refreshing statistics. 10.6 WLAN Station Status Click Monit or > W LAN 2 .4 G/ 5 G St at ion St at us or the W LAN 2 .4 G/ 5 G St at ion St at us

( Det ails...) hyperlink in the St at us screen. View the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG5615s 2.4GHz or 5GHz wireless network in the Associat ion List. Association means that a wireless client (for example, your network or computer with a wireless network card) has connected successfully to the AP (or wireless router) using the same SSID, channel and security settings. 92 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 50 Monitor > WLAN Station Status Chapter 10 Monitor The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 31 Monitor > WLAN Station Status LABEL DESCRIPTION

This is the index number of an associated wireless station. MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station. Association Time This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the NBG5615s WLAN. NBG5615 Users Guide 93 Chapter 10 Monitor 94 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 11 WAN 11.1 Overview This chapter discusses the NBG5615s W AN screens. Use these screens to configure your NBG5615 for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Figure 51 LAN and WAN 11.2 What You Can Do

Use the I nt ernet Connect ion screen to enter your ISP information and set how the computer acquires its IP, DNS and WAN MAC addresses (Section 11.4 on page 97).

Use the Advanced screen to enable multicasting, configure Windows networking and bridge

(Section 11.5 on page 104). 11.3 What You Need To Know The information in this section can help you configure the screens for your WAN connection, as well as enable/disable some advanced features of your NBG5615. NBG5615 Users Guide 95 Chapter 11 WAN 11.3.1 Configuring Your Internet Connection Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication. WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the NBG5615, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the NBG5615 to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the NBG5615 tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method). DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The NBG5615 can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways. 1 2 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields. If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the NBG5615s WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP. WAN MAC Address The MAC address screen allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN. Choose Fact ory Default to select the factory assigned default MAC Address. Otherwise, click Clone t he com put er's MAC address - I P Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to configuration file. It is recommended that you clone the MAC address prior to hooking up the WAN Port. 96 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 11 WAN Multicast Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. Figure 52 Multicast Example In the multicast example above, systems A and D comprise one multicast group. In multicasting, the server only needs to send one data stream and this is delivered to systems A and D. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. The NBG5615 supports both IGMP version 1

(I GMP- v1 ) and IGMP version 2 (I GMP- v2 ). At start up, the NBG5615 queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the NBG5615 periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/

disabled on the NBG5615 WAN interface in the Web Configurator (W AN ). Select N one to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces. 11.4 Internet Connection Use this screen to change your NBG5615s Internet access settings. Click N et w ork > W AN from the Configurat ion menu. The screen differs according to the encapsulation you choose. 11.4.1 IPoE Encapsulation This screen displays when you select I PoE encapsulation. NBG5615 Users Guide 97 Chapter 11 WAN Figure 53 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: IPoE Encapsulation The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 32 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: IPoE Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation You must choose the I PoE option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. Static IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Stat ic I P Address. Subnet Mask Enter the Subnet Mask in this field. Gateway IP Address MTU Size DNS Server Enter a Gat ew ay I P Address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field. Enter the MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) size for each packet. If a larger packet arrives, the NBG5615 divides it into smaller fragments. 98 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 11 WAN Table 32 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: IPoE Encapsulation (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server WAN MAC Address Select Obt a ined From I SP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information

(and the NBG5615's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User- Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User- Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User- Defined changes to N one after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User- Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User- Defined changes to N one after you click Apply. Select N one if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG5615s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Factory default Select Fact ory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address. Clone the computers MAC address - IP Address Set WAN MAC Address Apply Cancel Select Clone t he com put er's MAC address - I P Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 11.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation The NBG5615 supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF standard

(RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPP over Et hernet option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example Radius). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG5615 (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NBG5615 does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. NBG5615 Users Guide 99 Chapter 11 WAN This screen displays when you select PPPoE encapsulation. Figure 54 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 33 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation Select PPPoE if you connect to your Internet via dial-up. PPP Information PPP Username Type the user name given to you by your ISP. PPP Password Type the password associated with the user name above. MTU Size Enter the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) or the largest packet size per frame that your NBG5615 can receive and process. PPP Auto Connect Select this option if you do not want the connection to time out. Idle Timeout

(second) This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server. 100 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 11 WAN Table 33 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION PPPoE Service Name Enter the PPPoE service name specified in the ISP account. WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. Use Fixed IP Address My WAN IP Address DNS Server First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fix ed I P Address. Select Obt ained From I SP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG5615's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User- Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User- Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User- Defined changes to N one after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User- Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User- Defined changes to N one after you click Apply. Select N one if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. WAN MAC Address The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by using the NBG5615s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Factory default Select Fact ory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address. Clone the computers MAC address - IP Address Set WAN MAC Address Apply Cancel Select Clone t he com put er's MAC address - I P Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 11.4.3 PPTP Encapsulation Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-

based networks. PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet. NBG5615 Users Guide 101 Chapter 11 WAN This screen displays when you select PPTP encapsulation. Figure 55 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 34 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation PPTP Information To configure a PPTP client, you must configure the User N am e and Passw ord fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection. PPTP Username Type the user name given to you by your ISP. 102 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 11 WAN Table 34 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION PPTP Password Type the password associated with the User Name above. MTU Size Enter the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) or the largest packet size per frame that your NBG5615 can receive and process. PPPTP Auto Connect Select this option if you do not want the connection to time out. Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the NBG5615 automatically disconnects from the PPTP server. PPTP Configuration PPTP Server IP Address Type the IP address of the PPTP server. Obtain an IP Address Automatically Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. Static IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed I P Address. Your NBG5615 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG5615. Enter a Gat ew ay I P Address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field. WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP Select this to get your WAN IP address from your ISP. Use Fixed IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. My WAN IP Address DNS Server First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server WAN MAC Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed I P Address. Select Obtained From I SP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information

(and the NBG5615's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User- Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User- Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User- Defined changes to N one after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User- Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User- Defined changes to N one after you click Apply. Select N one if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG5615s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Factory default Select Fact ory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address. Clone the computers MAC address - IP Address Select Clone t he com put er's MAC address - I P Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Set WAN MAC Address Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. NBG5615 Users Guide 103 Chapter 11 WAN 11.5 Advanced WAN Screen To change your NBG5615s advanced WAN settings, click N et w ork > W AN > Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Figure 56 Network > WAN > Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Network > WAN > Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Setup Multicast Select I GMPv1 / v2 to enable multicasting. This applies to traffic routed from the WAN to the LAN. Select N one to disable this feature. This may cause incoming traffic to be dropped or sent to all connected network devices. Auto-Subnet Configuration Enable Auto-IP-

Change mode Select this option to have the NBG5615 change its LAN IP address to 10.0.0.1 or 192.168.1.1 accordingly when the NBG5615 gets a dynamic WAN IP address in the same subnet as the LAN IP address 192.168.1.1 or 10.0.0.1. The NAT, DHCP server and firewall functions on the NBG5615 are still available in this mode. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 104 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 12 Wireless LAN 12.1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your NBG5615. The NBG5615 is able to function both 2.4GHz and 5GHz network at the same time. You can have different wireless and wireless security settings for 2.4GHz and 5GHz wireless LANs. Click Configurat ion > N et w ork > W ireless LAN 2 .4 G or W ireless LAN 5 G to configure to do so. See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks. The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 57 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B are called wireless clients. The wireless clients use the access point (AP) to interact with other devices

(such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your NBG5615 is the AP. NBG5615 Users Guide 105 Chapter 12 Wireless LAN 12.1.1 What You Can Do

Use the General screen to turn the wireless connection on or off, set up wireless security between the NBG5615 and the wireless clients, and make other basic configuration changes

(Section 12.2 on page 110).

Use the More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your NBG5615 (Section 12.4 on page 118).

Use the MAC Filt er screen to allow or deny wireless stations based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the NBG5615 (Section 12.5 on page 121).

Use the Advanced screen to allow intra-BSS networking and set the RTS/CTS Threshold (Section 12.6 on page 123).

Use the QoS screen to ensure Quality of Service (QoS) in your wireless network (Section 12.7 on page 123).

Use the W PS screen to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually (Section 12.8 on page 124).

Use the W PS St at ion screen to add a wireless station using WPS (Section 12.9 on page 126).

Use the Scheduling screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off (Section 12.10 on page 126). 12.1.2 What You Should Know Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.

Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentity.

If two wireless networks overlap, they should use different channels. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information.

Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Wireless Security Overview The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. SSID Normally, the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the AP does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. 106 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 12 Wireless LAN MAC Address Filter Every wireless client has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each wireless client, see the appropriate Users Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a wireless client is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct settings (SSID, channel, and security). If a wireless client is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct settings. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC address of an authorized wireless client. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. User Authentication You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it. This is called user authentication. However, every wireless client in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, there are two typical places to store the user names and passwords for each user.

In the AP: this feature is called a local user database or a local database.

In a RADIUS server: this is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. Unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. Local user databases also have an additional limitation that is explained in the next section. Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. 1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. 2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. NBG5615 Users Guide 107 Chapter 12 Wireless LAN The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of user authentication. (See page 107 for information about this.) Table 36 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER W eak est No Security Static WEP WPA-PSK WPA St rongest WPA2-PSK WPA2 For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose W PA or W PA2 . If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, St at ic W EP, W PA- PSK, or W PA2 - PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose the AP does not have a local user database, and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no user authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two wireless clients. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up St at ic W EP in the wireless network. Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use W PA- PSK, W PA, or stronger encryption. IEEE 802.1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. Note: It is not possible to use W PA- PSK, W PA or stronger encryption with a local user database. In this case, it is better to set up stronger encryption with no authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database. When you select W PA2 or W PA2 - PSK in your NBG5615, you can also select an option (W PA/

W PA- PSK Com pat ible) to support WPA/WPA-PSK as well. In this case, if some wireless clients support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up W PA2 - PSK or W PA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the W PA/W PA- PSK Com pat ible option in the NBG5615. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every wireless client in the wireless network must have the same key. Guest WLAN Guest WLAN allows you to set up a wireless network where users can access to Internet via the NBG5615 (Z), but not other networks connected to the Z. In the following figure, a guest user can access the Internet from the guest wireless network A via Z but not the home or company network N . Note: The home or company network N and Guest WLAN network are independent networks. Note: Only Router mode supports guest WLAN. 108 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 12 Wireless LAN Figure 58 Guest Wireless LAN Network A Z N Guest WLAN Bandwidth The Guest WLAN Bandwidth function allows you to restrict the maximum bandwidth for the guest wireless network. Additionally, you can also define bandwidth for your home or office network. An example is shown next to define maximum bandwidth for your networks (A is Guest WLAN and N is home or company network.) Figure 59 Example: Bandwidth for Different Networks 600 kbps 100 kbps 300 kbps N A WPS WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Depending on the devices in your network, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (Personal Identification NBG5615 Users Guide 109 Chapter 12 Wireless LAN Number) in the devices. Then, they connect and set up a secure network by themselves. See how to set up a secure wireless network using WPS in the Section 9.2 on page 73. 12.2 General Wireless LAN Screen Use this screen to configure the SSID and wireless security of the wireless LAN. Note: If you are configuring the NBG5615 from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the NBG5615s SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the NBG5615s new settings. Click N et w ork > W ireless LAN 2 .4 G/ 5 G to open the General screen. Figure 60 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen. Table 37 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless LAN Select Enable to activate the 2.4GHz and/or 5GHz wireless LAN. Select Disable to turn it off. You can enable or disable both 2.4GHz and 5GHz wireless LANs by using the W I FI button located on the back panel of the NBG5615. Name (SSID) The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless client is associated. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable characters found on a typical English language keyboard) for the wireless LAN. Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. 110 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 12 Wireless LAN Table 37 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Channel Selection Set the operating frequency/channel depending on your particular region. Select a channel from the drop-down list box. The options vary depending on the frequency band and the country you are in. Refer to the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on channels. This option is only available if Aut o Channel Select ion is disabled. Select this check box for the NBG5615 to automatically choose the channel with the least interference. Deselect this check box if you wish to manually select the channel using the Channel Selection field. This displays the channel the NBG5615 is currently using. Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel Channel Width Select the wireless channel width used by NBG5615. A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 144Mbps (2.4GHz) or 217Mbps

(5GHZ) whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300Mbps (2.4GHz) or 450Mbps (5GHZ). Because not all devices support 40 MHz channels, select Auto 2 0 / 4 0 M Hz to allow the NBG5615 to adjust the channel bandwidth automatically. 40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal. Select 2 0 MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding. 802.11 Mode If you are in the W ireless LAN 2 .4 G > General screen, you can select from the following:

8 0 2 .1 1 b: allows either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NBG5615. In this mode, all wireless devices can only transmit at the data rates supported by IEEE 802.11b. 8 0 2 .1 1 g: allows IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices can associate with the NBG5615 only when they use the short preamble type. 8 0 2 .1 1 bg: allows either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NBG5615. The NBG5615 adjusts the transmission rate automatically according to the wireless standard supported by the wireless devices. 8 0 2 .1 1 n: allows IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NBG5615. This can increase transmission rates, although IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g clients will not be able to connect to the NBG5615. I 8 0 2 .1 1 gn: allows either IEEE 802.11g or IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NBG5615. The transmission rate of your NBG5615 might be reduced. 8 0 2 .1 1 bgn: allows IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g and IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NBG5615. The transmission rate of your NBG5615 might be reduced. If you are in the W ireless LAN 5 G > General screen, you can select from the following:

8 0 2 .1 1 a: allows only IEEE 802.11a compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NBG5615. 8 0 2 .1 1 an: allows both IEEE802.11n and IEEE802.11a compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NBG5615. The transmission rate of your NBG5615 might be reduced. NBG5615 Users Guide 111 Chapter 12 Wireless LAN Table 37 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Select St at ic W EP, W PA- PSK, W PA, W PA2 - PSK or W PA2 to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as this device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. See Section 12.3 on page 112 for detailed information on different security modes. Or you can select N o Securit y to allow any client to associate this network without authentication. Note: If the WPS function is enabled (default), only No Security and WPA2-PSK are available in this field. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen. 12.3 Wireless Security The screen varies depending on what you select in the Securit y Mode field. 12.3.1 No Security Select N o Securit y to allow wireless clients to communicate with the access points without any data encryption. Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG5615, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 61 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General: No Security 112 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 12 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General: No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose N o Securit y from the drop-down list box. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 12.3.2 WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private. It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a network. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key. Your NBG5615 allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time. Select St at ic W EP from the Securit y Mode list. NBG5615 Users Guide 113 Chapter 12 Wireless LAN Figure 62 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General: Static WEP The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 39 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General: Static WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Select St at ic W EP to enable data encryption. PassPhrase Enter a Passphrase (up to 26 printable characters) and click Generat e. A passphrase functions like a password. In WEP security mode, it is further converted by the NBG5615 into a complicated string that is referred to as the key. This key is requested from all devices wishing to connect to a wireless network. WEP Encryption Select 6 4 - bit s or 1 2 8 - bit s. Authentication Method This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use. Select Aut o or Shared Key from the drop-down list box. This field specifies whether the wireless clients have to provide the WEP key to login to the wireless client. Keep this setting at Aut o unless you want to force a key verification before communication between the wireless client and the NBG5615 occurs. Select Shared Key to force the clients to provide the WEP key prior to communication. 114 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 12 Wireless LAN Table 39 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General: Static WEP (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION ASCII Hex Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key. Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key. The preceding "0x", that identifies a hexadecimal key, is entered automatically. Key 1 to Key 4 The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the NBG5615 and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission. If you chose 6 4 - bit s, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters

("0-9", "A-F"). If you chose 1 2 8 - bit s, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-

9", "A-F"). You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at any one time. The default key is key 1. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 12.3.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK Select W PA- PSK or W PA2 - PSK from the Securit y Mode list. Figure 63 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK NBG5615 Users Guide 115 Chapter 12 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Select W PA- PSK or W PA2 - PSK to enable data encryption. WPA-PSK Compatible This field appears when you choose W PA2 - PSK as the Security Mode. Check this field to allow wireless devices using W PA- PSK security mode to connect to your NBG5615. Pre-Shared Key W PA- PSK/ W PA2 - PSK uses a simple common password for authentication. Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive keyboard characters. Group Key Update Timer The Group Key Updat e Tim er is the rate at which the AP sends a new group key out to all clients. The default is 3 6 0 0 seconds (60 minutes). Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 12.3.4 WPA/WPA2 Select W PA or W PA2 from the Securit y Mode list. Note: WPA or WPA2 is not available if you enable WPS before you configure WPA or WPA2 in the W ireless LAN 2 .4 G/ 5 G > General screen. 116 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 64 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General: WPA/WPA2 Chapter 12 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 41 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General: WPA/WPA2 LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Select W PA or W PA2 to enable data encryption. WPA Compatible This check box is available only when you select W PA2 - PSK or W PA2 in the Securit y M ode field. Group Key Update Timer Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the NBG5615 even when the NBG5615 is using WPA2-PSK or WPA2. The Group Key Updat e Tim er is the rate at which the AP (if using W PA- PSK/

W PA2 - PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using W PA/ W PA2 key management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is the WPA/WPA2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the Group Key Updat e Tim er is also supported in W PA- PSK/ W PA2 - PSK mode. PMK Cache Period This field is available only when you select W PA2 . Specify how often wireless clients have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 999999 minutes. Note: If wireless client authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority. NBG5615 Users Guide 117 Chapter 12 Wireless LAN Table 41 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General: WPA/WPA2 (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Pre-Authentication This field is available only when you select W PA2 . Authentication Server IP Address Port Number Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Select Enable to turn on preauthentication in WAP2. Otherwise, select Disable. Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation. Enter the port number of the external authentication server. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 127 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the NBG5615. Session Timeout The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your NBG5615. The key is not sent over the network. The NBG5615 automatically disconnects a wireless client from the wireless and wired networks after a period of inactivity. The wireless client needs to send the username and password again before it can use the wireless and wired networks again. Some wireless clients may prompt users for a username and password; other clients may use saved login credentials. In either case, there is usually a short delay while the wireless client logs in to the wireless network again. Apply Cancel Enter the time in seconds from 0 to 999999. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 12.4 More AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple wireless networks and guest wireless network settings on the NBG5615. You can configure up to four SSIDs to enable multiple BSSs (Basic Service Sets) on the NBG5615. This allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying security types to different SSIDs. Wireless clients can use different SSIDs to associate with the same access point. Click N et w ork > W ireless LAN 2 .4 G/ 5 G > More AP. The following screen displays. 118 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 65 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > More AP Chapter 12 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 42 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > More AP LABEL DESCRIPTION

Status SSID This is the index number of each SSID profile. This shows whether the SSID profile is active (a yellow bulb) or not (a gray bulb). An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the NBG5615s BSSs. The SSID

(Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated. This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility. Security Edit This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile. Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile. 12.4.1 More AP Edit Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen. The following screen displays. Figure 66 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > More AP: Edit NBG5615 Users Guide 119 Chapter 12 Wireless LAN Figure 67 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > More AP: Edit (the last SSID) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 43 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > More AP: Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate the SSID profile. Name (SSID) The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless client is associated. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable characters found on a typical English language keyboard) for the wireless LAN. Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Intra-BSS Traffic A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless clients can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless clients can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. WMM QoS Check this to have the NBG5615 automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly. Enable Guest WLAN Select the check box to activate guest wireless LAN. This is available only for the last SSID on the NBG5615. Note: Only Router mode supports guest WLAN. AP mode, Universal Repeater mode, WISP mode and WISP + Universal Repeater mode dont support guest WLAN. Type an IP address for the devices on the Guest WLAN using this as the gateway IP address. Type the subnet mask for the guest wireless LAN. IP Address IP Subnet Mask 120 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 12 Wireless LAN Table 43 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > More AP: Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Bandwidth Management for Guest WLAN Maximum Bandwidth Security Mode Select this to turn on bandwidth management for the Guest WLAN network. Enter a number to specify maximum bandwidth the Guest WLAN network can use. Select St atic W EP, W PA- PSK, W PA, W PA2 - PSK or W PA2 to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as this device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. See Section 12.3 on page 112 for detailed information on different security modes. Or you can select N o Security to allow any client to associate this network without authentication. Note: If the WPS function is enabled (default), only No Security and WPA2-PSK are available in this field. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 12.5 MAC Filter Screen The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NBG5615 to give exclusive access to devices

(Allow ) or exclude devices from accessing the NBG5615 (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen. To change your NBG5615s MAC filter settings, click N et w ork > W ireless LAN 2 .4 G/ 5 G > MAC Filt er. The screen appears as shown. NBG5615 Users Guide 121 Chapter 12 Wireless LAN Figure 68 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this menu. Table 44 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION SSID Select Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filtering. MAC Address Filter Select to turn on (Enable) or off (Disable) MAC address filtering. Filter Action Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Filter Summary table. Select Allow to permit access to the NBG5615, MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the NBG5615. Select Deny to block access to the NBG5615, MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the NBG5615. MAC Filter Summary Set This is the index number of the MAC address. MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to the NBG5615. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 122 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 12 Wireless LAN 12.6 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen Use this screen to allow wireless advanced features, such as the output power, RTS/CTS Threshold settings. Click N et w ork > W ireless LAN 2 .4 G/ 5 G > Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Figure 69 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 45 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION RTS/CTS Threshold Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To Send)/

CTS (Clear To Send) handshake. This field is not configurable and the NBG5615 automatically changes to use the maximum value if you select 8 0 2 .1 1 n, 8 0 2 .1 1 an, 8 0 2 .1 1 gn or 8 0 2 .1 1 bgn in the W ireless LAN 2 .4 G/ 5 G > General screen. Fragmentation Threshold The threshold (number of bytes) for the fragmentation boundary for directed messages. It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. This field is not configurable and the NBG5615 automatically changes to use the maximum value if you select 8 0 2 .1 1 n, 8 0 2 .1 1 an, 8 0 2 .1 1 gn or 8 0 2 .1 1 bgn in the W ireless LAN 2 .4 G/ 5 G > General screen. Intra-BSS Traffic A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless clients can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless clients can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Set the output power of the NBG5615 in this field. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the NBG5615 to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following 1 0 0 % , 9 0 % , 7 5 % , 5 0 % , 2 5 % or 1 0 % . Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Tx Power Apply Cancel 12.7 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen The QoS screen allows you to automatically give a service (such as VoIP and video) a priority level. NBG5615 Users Guide 123 Chapter 12 Wireless LAN Click N et w ork > W ireless LAN 2 .4 G/ 5 G > QoS. The following screen appears. Figure 70 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 46 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > QoS LABEL DESCRIPTION WMM QoS Select Enable to have the NBG5615 automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly. This field is not configurable and the NBG5615 automatically enables WMM QoS if you select 8 0 2 .1 1 n, 8 0 2 .1 1 an, 8 0 2 .1 1 gn or 8 0 2 .1 1 bgn in the W ireless LAN 2 4 G/ 5 G

> General screen. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 12.8 WPS Screen Use this screen to enable/disable WPS, view or generate a new PIN number and check current WPS status. To open this screen, click N et w ork > W ireless LAN 2 .4 G/ 5 G > W PS. Note: With WPS, wireless clients can only connect to the wireless network using the first SSID on the NBG5615. 124 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 71 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > WPS Chapter 12 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION WPS Setup WPS PIN Code PIN Number WPS Status Status Release Configuration 802.11 Mode SSID Security Select Enable to turn on the WPS feature. Otherwise, select Disable. Select Enable and click Apply to allow the PIN Configuration method. If you select Disable, you cannot create a new PIN number. This is the WPS PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the NBG5615. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to the NBG5615 using WPS. The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method. Click Generat e to generate a new PIN number. This displays Configured when the NBG5615 has connected to a wireless network using WPS or when W PS Enable is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed. The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen. This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there are no wireless or wireless security changes on the NBG5615 or you click Release Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings. This button is only available when the WPS status displays Configured. Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the NBG5615. This is the 802.11 mode used. Only compliant WLAN devices can associate with the NBG5615. This is the name of the wireless network (the NBG5615s first SSID). This is the type of wireless security employed by the network. NBG5615 Users Guide 125 Chapter 12 Wireless LAN Table 47 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > WPS (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. 12.9 WPS Station Screen Use this screen when you want to add a wireless station using WPS. To open this screen, click N et w ork > W ireless LAN 2 .4 G/ 5 G > W PS St at ion tab. Note: After you click Push But t on on this screen, you have to press a similar button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes. To add the second wireless station, you have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the first 2 minutes. Figure 72 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > WPS Station The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 48 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > WPS Station LABEL DESCRIPTION Push Button Use this button when you use the PBC (Push Button Configuration) method to configure wireless stationss wireless settings. Click this to start WPS-aware wireless station scanning and the wireless security information synchronization. Or input stations PIN number Use this button when you use the PIN Configuration method to configure wireless stations wireless settings. Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless stations utility. Then click Start to associate to each other and perform the wireless security information synchronization. 12.10 Scheduling Screen Use this screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off. Wireless LAN scheduling is disabled by default. The wireless LAN can be scheduled to turn on or off on certain days and at certain times. To open this screen, click N et w ork > W ireless LAN 2 .4 G/ 5 G > Scheduling tab. 126 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 73 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > Scheduling Chapter 12 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 49 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > Scheduling LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless LAN Scheduling Wireless LAN Scheduling Scheduling WLAN Status Day For the following times (24-Hour Format) Select Enable to activate the wireless LAN scheduling feature. Select Disable to turn it off. Select On or Off to specify whether the Wireless LAN is turned on or off. This field works in conjunction with the Day and For t he follow ing tim es fields. Select Everyday or the specific days to turn the Wireless LAN on or off. If you select Everyday you can not select any specific days. This field works in conjunction with the For t he follow ing t im es field. Select a begin time using the first set of hour and minute (m in) drop down boxes and select an end time using the second set of hour and minute (m in) drop down boxes. If you have chosen On earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn on between the two times you enter in these fields. If you have chosen Off earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn off between the two times you enter in these fields. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 127 Chapter 12 Wireless LAN 128 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 13 LAN 13.1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings. A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached. A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area, usually the same building or floor of a building. Figure 74 LAN Example The LAN screens can help you configure a manage IP address, and partition your physical network into logical networks. 13.2 What You Can Do

Use the I P screen to change the IP address for your NBG5615 (Section 13.4 on page 130).

Use the I P Alias screen to have the NBG5615 apply IP alias to create LAN subnets (Section 13.5 on page 131). 13.3 What You Need To Know The actual physical connection determines whether the NBG5615 ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. NBG5615 Users Guide 129 Chapter 13 LAN Figure 75 LAN and WAN IP Addresses The LAN parameters of the NBG5615 are preset in the factory with the following values:

IP address of 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 (24 bits)

DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33. These parameters should work for the majority of installations. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server address(es), read the embedded Web Configurator help regarding what fields need to be configured. 13.3.1 IP Pool Setup The NBG5615 is pre-configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64. This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses (excluding the NBG5615 itself) in the lower range (192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.32) for other server computers, for instance, servers for mail, FTP, TFTP, web, etc., that you may have. 13.3.2 LAN TCP/IP The NBG5615 has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. 13.3.3 IP Alias IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The NBG5615 supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the NBG5615 itself as the gateway for each LAN network. 13.4 LAN IP Screen Use this screen to change the IP address for your NBG5615. Click N et w ork > LAN > I P. 130 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 76 Network > LAN > IP Chapter 13 LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 50 Network > LAN > IP LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Type the IP address of your NBG5615 in dotted decimal notation. IP Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG5615 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG5615. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 13.5 IP Alias Screen Use this screen to have the NBG5615 apply IP alias to create LAN subnets. Click LAN I P Alias. Figure 77 Network > LAN > IP Alias NBG5615 Users Guide 131 Chapter 13 LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 51 Network > LAN > IP Alias LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Alias 1, 2 IP Address IP Subnet Mask Check this to enable IP alias to configure another LAN network for the NBG5615. Type the IP alias address of your NBG5615 in dotted decimal notation. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG5615 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG5615. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 132 NBG5615 Users Guide

C HAPTER 14 DHCP Server 14.1 Overview DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NBG5615s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NBG5615 provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. 14.1.1 What You Can Do

Use the General screen to enable the DHCP server (Section 14.2 on page 133).

Use the Advanced screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses (Section 14.3 on page 134).

Use the Client List screen to view the current DHCP client information (Section 14.4 on page 136). 14.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. MAC Addresses Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen. 14.2 DHCP Server General Screen Use this screen to enable the DHCP server. Click N et w ork > DHCP Server. The following screen displays. NBG5615 Users Guide 133 Chapter 14 DHCP Server Figure 78 Network > DHCP Server > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 52 Network > DHCP Server > General LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Server Select Enable to activate DHCP for LAN. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients (computers) to obtain TCP/IP configuration at startup from a server. Enable the DHCP server unless your ISP instructs you to do otherwise. Select Disable to stop the NBG5615 acting as a DHCP server. When configured as a server, the NBG5615 provides TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If not, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computers must be manually configured. When set as a server, fill in the following four fields. This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool for LAN. This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool for LAN. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. IP Pool Starting Address Pool Size Apply Cancel 14.3 DHCP Server Advanced Screen This screen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses. You can also use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the NBG5615 sends to the DHCP clients. To change your NBG5615s static DHCP settings, click N et w ork > DHCP Server > Advanced. The following screen displays. 134 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 79 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced Chapter 14 DHCP Server The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 53 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Static DHCP Table

This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row). MAC Address Type the MAC address (with colons) of a computer on your LAN. IP Address DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN. The NBG5615 passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address (in the order you specify here) to the DHCP clients. The NBG5615 only passes this information to the LAN DHCP clients when you enable DHCP Server. When you disable DH CP Server, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured. NBG5615 Users Guide 135 Chapter 14 DHCP Server Table 53 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server Select Obt ained From I SP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information

(and the NBG5615's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User- Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User- Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User- Defined changes to N one after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User- Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-

Defined changes to N one after you click Apply. Select DN S Relay to have the NBG5615 act as a DNS proxy. The NBG5615's LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (read-only). The NBG5615 tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the NBG5615 itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the NBG5615, the NBG5615 forwards the query to the NBG5615's system DNS server (configured in the W AN > I nt ernet Connection screen) and relays the response back to the computer. You can only select DN S Relay for one of the three servers; if you select DN S Relay for a second or third DNS server, that choice changes to N one after you click Apply. Select N one if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 14.4 DHCP Client List Screen The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name and MAC Address) of network clients using the NBG5615s DHCP servers. Configure this screen to always assign an IP address to a MAC address (and host name). Click N et w ork > DHCP Server > Client List . Note: You can also view a read-only client list by clicking Monit or > DHCP Server. Figure 80 Network > DHCP Server > Client List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 54 Network > DHCP Server > Client List LABEL DESCRIPTION

Status This is the index number of the host computer. This field displays whether the connection to the host computer is up (a yellow bulb) or down (a gray bulb). 136 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 14 DHCP Server Table 54 Network > DHCP Server > Client List (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name IP Address This field displays the computer host name. This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. MAC Address This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host N am e field. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address which uniquely identifies a device. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Select this if you want to reserve the IP address for this specific MAC address. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Reserve Apply Cancel NBG5615 Users Guide 137 Chapter 14 DHCP Server 138 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 15 NAT 15.1 Overview NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network. The figure below is a simple illustration of a NAT network. You want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses to the devices (A to D) connected to your NBG5615. The ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. All traffic coming from A to D going out to the Internet use the IP address of the NBG5615, which is 192.168.1.1. Figure 81 NAT Example A: 192.168.1.33 FTP, Telnet, SNMP Ports 21 to 25 B: 192.168.1.34 Port 80 C: 192.168.1.35 LAN WAN 192.168.1.1 IP address assigned by ISP This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the NBG5615. Note: You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the NBG5615. 15.1.1 What You Can Do

Use the General screen to enable NAT (Section 15.2 on page 141). NBG5615 Users Guide 139 Chapter 15 NAT

Use the Port Forw arding screen to set a default server and change your NBG5615s port forwarding settings to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network

(Section 15.3 on page 142).

Use the Port Trigger screen to change your NBG5615s trigger port settings (Section 15.5.3 on page 147). 15.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Inside/Outside This denotes where a host is located relative to the NBG5615, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/Local This denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. Note: Inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. An inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 55 NAT Definitions ITEM Inside DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. Outside This refers to the host on the WAN. Local Global This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. Note: NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber

(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local 140 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 15 NAT network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers , NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your NBG5615 filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The I P Net work Address Translator ( NAT). How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The NBG5615 keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 82 How NAT Works 15.2 General Use this screen to enable NAT and set a default server. Click N et w ork > N AT to open the General screen. Figure 83 Network > NAT > General NBG5615 Users Guide 141 Chapter 15 NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Network > NAT > General LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Address Translation (NAT) Network Address Translation (NAT) allows the translation of an Internet protocol address used within one network (for example a private IP address used in a local network) to a different IP address known within another network (for example a public IP address used on the Internet). Select Enable to activate NAT. Select Disable to turn it off. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 15.3 Port Forwarding Screen Use this screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network and set a default server. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server. If the default is not defined, the service request is simply discarded. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming services will be forwarded. To change your NBG5615s port forwarding settings, click Net w ork > N AT > Port Forw arding. The screen appears as shown. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server, the NBG5615 discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management. Refer to Appendix C on page 249 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. 142 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 84 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding Chapter 15 NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 57 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Server Setup Default Server In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forw arding screen. You can decide whether you want to use the default server or specify a server manually. Select this to use the default server. Change to Server Select this and manually enter the servers IP address. Service Name Select a pre-defined service from the drop-down list box. The pre-defined service port number(s) and protocol will be displayed in the port forwarding summary table. Otherwise, select User define to manually enter the port number(s) and select the IP protocol. Service Protocol Select the transport layer protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP_ UDP. If you have chosen a pre-defined service in the Service N am e field, the protocol will be configured automatically. Server IP Address Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here and click Add to add it in the port forwarding summary table.

Status Name Protocol Port This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry. This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled. This field displays a name to identify this rule. This is the transport layer protocol used for the service. This field displays the port number(s). Server IP Address This field displays the inside IP address of the server. Modify Click the Edit icon to open the edit screen where you can modify an existing rule. Click the Delet e icon to remove a rule. NBG5615 Users Guide 143 Chapter 15 NAT Table 57 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 15.3.1 Port Forwarding Edit Screen This screen lets you edit a port forwarding rule. Click a rules Edit icon in the Port Forw arding screen to open the following screen. Figure 85 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Forwarding Select Enable to turn on this rule and the requested service can be forwarded to the host with a specified internal IP address. Service Name Select Disable to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry. Type a name (of up to 31 printable characters) to identify this rule in the first field next to Service N am e. Otherwise, select a predefined service in the second field next to Service N am e. The predefined service name and port number(s) will display in the Service N am e and Port fields. Protocol Select the transport layer protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP_ UDP. If you have chosen a pre-defined service in the Service N am e field, the protocol will be configured automatically. Port Type a port number(s) to define the service to be forwarded to the specified server. To specify a range of ports, enter a hyphen (-) between the first port and the last port, such as 10-. Server IP Address Type the IP address of the server on your LAN that receives packets from the port(s) specified in the Port field. Back Apply Cancel Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 144 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 15 NAT 15.4 Port Trigger Screen To change your NBG5615s trigger port settings, click N et w ork > N AT > Port Trigger. The screen appears as shown. Note: Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port (range) at a time. Figure 86 Network > NAT > Port Trigger The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 59 Network > NAT > Port Trigger LABEL DESCRIPTION

Name Incoming This is the rule index number (read-only). Type a unique name (up to 15 characters) for identification purposes. All characters are permitted - including spaces. Incoming is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The NBG5615 forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Trigger The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the NBG5615 to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. NBG5615 Users Guide 145 Chapter 15 NAT 15.5 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG5615 features described in this chapter. 15.5.1 NATPort Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make accessible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single machine to the outside world. Use the Port Forw arding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server. If the default is not defined, the service request is simply discarded. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. 15.5.2 NAT Port Forwarding Example Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 87 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example 146 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 15 NAT 15.5.3 Trigger Port Forwarding Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service

(coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address. Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The NBG5615 records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the NBG5615's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("incoming"

port), the NBG5615 forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computers connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application. 15.5.4 Trigger Port Forwarding Example The following is an example of trigger port forwarding. Figure 88 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example Janes com put er Real Audio Server Port 7 0 7 0 1 2 3 4 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070). Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the NBG5615 to record Janes computer IP address. The NBG5615 associates Jane's computer IP address with the "incoming" port range of 6970-7170. The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170. The NBG5615 forwards the traffic to Janes computer IP address. 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The NBG5615 times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol), or two hours with TCP/IP

(Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). NBG5615 Users Guide 147 Chapter 15 NAT 15.5.5 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports 1 2 Trigger events only happen on data that is coming from inside the NBG5615 and going to the outside. If an application needs a continuous data stream, that port (range) will be tied up so that another computer on the LAN cant trigger it. 148 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 16 DDNS 16.1 Overview DDNS services let you use a domain name with a dynamic IP address. 16.1.1 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. What is DDNS?

Dynamic Domain Name Service (DDNS) services let you use a fixed domain name with a dynamic IP address. Users can always use the same domain name instead of a different dynamic IP address that changes each time to connect to the NBG5615 or a server in your network. Note: The NBG5615 must have a public global IP address and you should have your registered DDNS account information on hand. 16.2 General To change your NBG5615s DDNS, click N et w ork > DDNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 89 Dynamic DNS NBG5615 Users Guide 149 Chapter 16 DDNS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 60 Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Select Enable to use dynamic DNS. Select Disable to turn this feature off. Service Provider Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider. Host Name Usename Password Apply Cancel Enter a host names in the field provided. You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (","). Enter your user name. Enter the password assigned to you. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 150 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 17 Static Route 17.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your NBG5615. The NBG5615 usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the NBG5615 send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the NBG5615s LAN interface. The NBG5615 routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the NBG5615s default gateway (R1 ). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2 . You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 90 Example of Static Routing Topology A R3 LAN WAN R1 R2 17.2 IP Static Route Screen Click N et w ork > St at ic Rout e to open the St at ic Rout e screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 151 Chapter 17 Static Route Figure 91 Network > Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 61 Network > Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Static Route Click this to create a new rule.

Status Name Destination Gateway This is the number of an individual static route. This field indicates whether the rule is active (yellow bulb) or not (gray bulb). This field displays a name to identify this rule. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Subent Mask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination. Modify Click the Edit icon to open a screen where you can modify an existing rule. Apply Cancel Click the Delete icon to remove a rule from the NBG5615. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 17.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route Click the Add St at ic Rout e button or a rules Edit icon in the St at ic Rout e screen. Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route. Figure 92 Network > Static Route: Add/Edit 152 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 17 Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 62 Network > Static Route: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Static Route Route Name Destination IP Address Select to enable or disable this rule. Type a name to identify this rule. You can use up to printable English keyboard characters, including spaces. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here. Gateway IP Address Enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your NBG5615's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Back Apply Cancel Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. NBG5615 Users Guide 153 Chapter 17 Static Route 154 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 18 Firewall 18.1 Overview Use these screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your NBG5615 and your LAN from unwanted or malicious traffic. Enable the firewall to protect your LAN computers from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access between the LAN and WAN. By default the firewall:

allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all of the networks.

blocks traffic that originates on the other networks from going to the LAN. The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4). Figure 93 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN A 1 2 3 4 18.1.1 What You Can Do

Use the General screen to enable or disable the NBG5615s firewall (Section 18.2 on page 157).

Use the Services screen enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you want to block and the date/time you want to block them (Section 18.3 on page 157). 18.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. NBG5615 Users Guide 155 Chapter 18 Firewall What is a Firewall?

Originally, the term firewall referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of fire from one room to another. The networking term "firewall" is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control policy between two networks. It may also be defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from a network that is not trusted. Of course, firewalls cannot solve every security problem. A firewall is one of the mechanisms used to establish a network security perimeter in support of a network security policy. It should never be the only mechanism or method employed. For a firewall to guard effectively, you must design and deploy it appropriately. This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information-security policy. In addition, specific policies must be implemented within the firewall itself. Stateful Inspection Firewall Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules. They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol. They also "inspect" the session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols. These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency; however, they may lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support. Firewalls, of one type or another, have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises. About the NBG5615 Firewall The NBG5615s firewall feature physically separates the LAN and the WAN and acts as a secure gateway for all data passing between the networks. It is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated (click the General tab under Firew all and then click the Enable Firew all check box). The NBG5615's purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network (LAN) to be securely connected to the Internet. The NBG5615 can be used to prevent theft, destruction and modification of data, as well as log events, which may be important to the security of your network. The NBG5615 is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet. This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN. The NBG5615 has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports, which are used to physically separate the network into two areas.The WAN (Wide Area Network) port attaches to the broadband

(cable or DSL) modem to the Internet. The LAN (Local Area Network) port attaches to a network of computers, which needs security from the outside world. These computers will have access to Internet services such as e-mail, FTP and the World Wide Web. However, "inbound access" is not allowed (by default) unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service. Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall Change the default password via Web Configurator. Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way, including attaching a modem to the port. Limit who can access your router. NBG5615 Users Guide 1 2 3 156 Chapter 18 Firewall 4 Don't enable any local service (such as NTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network. 5 6 7 For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces. Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active. Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room. 18.2 General Screen Use this screen to enable or disable the NBG5615s firewall, and set up firewall logs. Click Securit y

> Firew all to open the General screen. Figure 94 Security > Firewall > General l The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 63 Security > Firewall > General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Firewall Select this check box to activate the firewall. The NBG5615 performs access control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is activated. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save the settings. Click Cancel to start configuring this screen again. 18.3 Services Screen If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your NBG5615, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the NBG5615 exists. Use this screen to prevent the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your NBG5615 when unsupported ports are probed. You can also use this screen to enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you want to block and the date/time you want to block them. Click Securit y > Firew all > Services. The screen appears as shown next. NBG5615 Users Guide 157 Chapter 18 Firewall Figure 95 Security > Firewall > Services l The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 64 Security > Firewall > Services LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL ICMP DESCRIPTION Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error-reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user. Respond to Ping on The NBG5615 will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select W AN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests. Otherwise select LAN & W AN to reply to all incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests. Apply Click Apply to save the settings. Enable Firewall Rule Enable Firewall Rule Select this check box to activate the firewall rules that you define (see Add Firew all Rule below). Apply Click Apply to save the settings. Add Firewall Rule Service Name Enter a name that identifies or describes the firewall rule. MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the computer for which the firewall rule applies. Dest IP Address Enter the IP address of the computer to which traffic for the application or service is entering. The NBG5615 applies the firewall rule to traffic initiating from this computer. 158 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 18 Firewall Table 64 Security > Firewall > Services (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Source IP Address Enter the IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the application or service. The NBG5615 applies the firewall rule to traffic initiating from this computer. Protocol Select the protocol (TCP, UDP or I CMP) used to transport the packets for which you want to apply the firewall rule. Dest Port Range Enter the port number/range of the destination that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Source Port Range Add Rule Firewall Rule

Enter the port number/range of the source that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Click Add to save the firewall rule. This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn. Service Name This is a name that identifies or describes the firewall rule. MAC address This is the MAC address of the computer for which the firewall rule applies. Dest IP Source IP Protocol This is the IP address of the computer to which traffic for the application or service is entering. This is the IP address of the computer from which traffic for the application or service is initialized. This is the protocol (TCP, UDP or I CMP) used to transport the packets for which you want to apply the firewall rule. Dest Port Range This is the port number/range of the destination that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Source Port Range This is the port number/range of the source that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Action Delete Cancel DROP - Traffic matching the conditions of the firewall rule are stopped. Click Delet e to remove the firewall rule. Click Cancel to start configuring this screen again. See Appendix C on page 249 for commonly used services and port numbers. NBG5615 Users Guide 159 Chapter 18 Firewall 160 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 19 Content Filtering 19.1 Overview This chapter provides a brief overview of content filtering using the embedded web GUI. Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to your needs. Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features or specific URL keywords. 19.1.1 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Content Filtering Profiles Content filtering allows you to block certain web features, such as cookies, and/or block access to specific web sites. For example, you can configure one policy that blocks John Does access to arts and entertainment web pages. A content filtering profile conveniently stores your custom settings for the following features. Keyword Blocking URL Checking The NBG5615 checks the URLs domain name (or IP address) and file path separately when performing keyword blocking. The URLs domain name or IP address is the characters that come before the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, the domain name is www.zyxel.com.tw. The file path is the characters that come after the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, the file path is news/pressroom.php. Since the NBG5615 checks the URLs domain name (or IP address) and file path separately, it will not find items that go across the two. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/

pressroom.php, the NBG5615 would find tw in the domain name (www.zyxel.com.tw). It would also find news in the file path (news/pressroom.php) but it would not find tw/news. 19.2 Content Filter Use this screen to restrict web features, add keywords for blocking and designate a trusted computer. Click Securit y > Cont ent Filt er to open the Cont ent Filt er screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 161 Chapter 19 Content Filtering Figure 96 Security > Content Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 65 Security > Content Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Trusted IP Setup To enable this feature, type an IP address of any one of the computers in your network that you want to have as a trusted computer. This allows the trusted computer to have full access to all features that are configured to be blocked by content filtering. Restrict Web Features ActiveX Java Cookies Web Proxy Leave this field blank to have no trusted computers. Select the box(es) to restrict a feature. When you download a page containing a restricted feature, that part of the web page will appear blank or grayed out. A tool for building dynamic and active Web pages and distributed object applications. When you visit an ActiveX Web site, ActiveX controls are downloaded to your browser, where they remain in case you visit the site again. A programming language and development environment for building downloadable Web components or Internet and intranet business applications of all kinds. Used by Web servers to track usage and provide service based on ID. A server that acts as an intermediary between a user and the Internet to provide security, administrative control, and caching service. When a proxy server is located on the WAN it is possible for LAN users to circumvent content filtering by pointing to this proxy server. Enable URL Keyword Blocking The NBG5615 can block Web sites with URLs that contain certain keywords in the domain name or IP address. For example, if the keyword "bad" was enabled, all sites containing this keyword in the domain name or IP address will be blocked, e.g., URL http://

www.website.com/bad.html would be blocked. Select this check box to enable this feature. Keyword Type a keyword in this field. You may use any character (up to 64 characters). Wildcards are not allowed. You can also enter a numerical IP address. Add Click Add after you have typed a keyword. Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed. When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request. 162 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 19 Content Filtering Table 65 Security > Content Filter (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Keyword List This list displays the keywords already added. Delete Clear All Apply Cancel Highlight a keyword in the lower box and click Delet e to remove it. The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply. Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 19.3 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG5615 features described in this chapter. 19.3.1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking You can use commands to set how much of a websites URL the content filter is to check for keyword blocking. See the appendices for information on how to access and use the command interpreter. Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking By default, the NBG5615 checks the URLs domain name or IP address when performing keyword blocking. This means that the NBG5615 checks the characters that come before the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, content filtering only searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw. Full Path URL Checking Full path URL checking has the NBG5615 check the characters that come before the last slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, full path URL checking searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw/news/. Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 6 [disable | enable] command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's full path. File Name URL Checking Filename URL checking has the NBG5615 check all of the characters in the URL. For example, filename URL checking searches for keywords within the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/

news/pressroom.php. NBG5615 Users Guide 163 Chapter 19 Content Filtering Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 8 [disable | enable] command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's complete filename. 164 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 20 Bandwidth Management 20.1 Overview This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management and editing rules. ZyXELs Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application. In the figure below, uplink traffic goes from the LAN device (A) to the WAN device (B). Bandwidth management is applied before sending the packets out to the WAN. Downlink traffic comes back from the WAN device (B) to the LAN device (A). Bandwidth management is applied before sending the traffic out to LAN. Figure 97 Bandwidth Management Example

-> VOIP

-> FTP

-> HTTP

-> Chat, Email A B You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity (bandwidth budgets) to individual applications (like VoIP, Web, FTP, and E-mail for example). 20.2 What You Can Do

Use the General screen to enable bandwidth management and assign bandwidth values (Section 20.4 on page 166).

Use the Advanced screen to configure bandwidth managements rule for the pre-defined services and applications (Section 20.5 on page 166). NBG5615 Users Guide 165 Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management 20.3 What You Need To Know The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface (LAN to WAN, WLAN to WAN) must be less than or equal to the Upst ream Bandw idt h that you configure in the Bandw idt h Managem ent Advanced screen (Section 20.5 on page 166). The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN interface (WAN to LAN, WAN to WLAN) must be less than or equal to the Dow nst ream Bandw idt h that you configure in the Bandw idt h Managem ent Advanced screen Section 20.5 on page 166. 20.4 General Screen Use this screen to have the NBG5615 apply bandwidth management. Click Managem ent > Bandw idt h MGMT to open the bandwidth management General screen. Figure 98 Management > Bandwidth Management > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 66 Management > Bandwidth Management > General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Bandwidth Management This field allows you to have NBG5615 apply bandwidth management. Enable bandwidth management to give traffic that matches a bandwidth rule priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth rule. Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to control the maximum or minimum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches a bandwidth rule. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 20.5 Advanced Screen Use this screen to configure bandwidth management rules for the pre-defined services or applications. You can also use this screen to configure bandwidth management rule for other services or applications that are not on the pre-defined list of NBG5615. Additionally, you can define the source and destination IP addresses and port for a service or application. 166 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management Note: The two tables shown in this screen can be configured and applied at the same time. Click Managem ent > Bandw idt h MGMT > Advanced to open the bandwidth management Advanced screen. Figure 99 Management > Bandwidth Management > Advanced NBG5615 Users Guide 167 Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 67 Management > Bandwidth Management > Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Management Bandwidth Upstream Bandwidth Select the total amount of bandwidth from a drop-down list box that you want to dedicate to uplink traffic. Otherwise, select User Defined and manually specify the amount of bandwidth in kilobits per second. This is traffic from LAN/WLAN to WAN. Downstream Bandwidth Select the total amount of bandwidth from a drop-down list box that you want to dedicate to uplink traffic. Otherwise, select User Defined and manually specify the amount of bandwidth in kilobits per second. This is traffic from WAN to LAN/WLAN. Application List Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth based on a pre-defined service.

Priority This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule. Select a priority from the drop down list box. Choose High, Mid or Low .

High - Select this for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay).

Mid - Select this for "excellent effort" or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. Low - Select this for non-critical "background" traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.

Category Service This is the category where a service belongs. This is the name of the service. Select the check box to have the NBG5615 apply this bandwidth management rule. Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configurat ion screen where you can modify the rule. User-defined Service Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific applications or services you specify.

Enable Direction This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule. Select this check box to have the NBG5615 apply this bandwidth management rule. Select To LAN & W LAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic from WAN to LAN and WLAN. Select To W AN to apply bandwidth management to traffic from LAN/WLAN to WAN. Service Name Enter a descriptive name for the bandwidth management rule. Category Modify Apply Cancel This is the category where a service belongs. Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configurat ion screen. Modify an existing rule or create a new rule in the Rule Configuration screen. See Section 20.5.2 on page 169 for more information. Click the Rem ove icon to delete a rule. Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 20.5.1 Rule Configuration: Application Rule Configuration If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for a pre-defined service or application, click the Edit icon in the Applicat ion List table of the Advanced screen. The following screen displays. 168 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 100 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: Application List Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 68 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: Application List LABEL

Enable Direction Bandwidth Destination Port Source Port Protocol Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule. Select an interfaces check box to enable bandwidth management on that interface. These read-only labels represent the physical interfaces. Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router through the interface, regardless of the traffics source. Traffic redirect or IP alias may cause LAN-to-LAN traffic to pass through the NBG5615 and be managed by bandwidth management. Select Maxim um Bandw idt h or M inim um Bandw idt h and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second. This is the port number of the destination that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. See Appendix C on page 249 for some common services and port numbers. This is the port number of the source that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. See Appendix C on page 249 for some common services and port numbers. This is the protocol (TCP, UDP or user- defined) used for the service. Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 20.5.2 Rule Configuration: User Defined Service Rule Configuration If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for other applications or services, click the Edit icon in the User- defined Service table of the Advanced screen. The following screen displays. NBG5615 Users Guide 169 Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management Figure 101 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: User-defined Service The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 69 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: User-defined Service LABEL DESCRIPTION BW Budget Destination Address Start Select Maxim um Bandw idt h or Minim um Bandw idt h and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second. Enter the starting IP address of the destination computer. The NBG5615 applies bandwidth management to the service or application that is entering this computer. Destination Address End Enter the ending IP address of the destination computer. The NBG5615 applies bandwidth management to the service or application that is entering this computer. Destination Port This is the port number of the destination that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Source Address Start Enter the starting IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the application or service. The NBG5615 applies bandwidth management to traffic initiating from this computer. Source Address End Enter the ending IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the application or service. Source Port Protocol The NBG5615 applies bandwidth management to traffic initiating from this computer. This is the port number of the source that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Select the protocol (TCP, UDP, BOTH) for which the bandwidth management rule applies. If you select BOTH, enter the protocol for which the bandwidth management rule applies. For example, ICMP for ping traffic. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. See Appendix C on page 249 for commonly used services and port numbers. 170 NBG5615 Users Guide 20.5.3 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management The following is a description of some services that you can select and to which you can apply media bandwidth management in the Managem ent > Bandw idt h MGMT > Advanced screen. Table 70 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION FTP WWW E-Mail VoIP (SIP) BitTorrent Gaming File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. The World Wide Web (WWW) is an Internet system to distribute graphical, hyper-linked information, based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) - a client/server protocol for the World Wide Web. The Web is not synonymous with the Internet; rather, it is just one service on the Internet. Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups. The Web is accessed through use of a browser. Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals. Here are some default ports for e-mail:

Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP. Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) is an internationally recognized standard for implementing VoIP. SIP is an application-layer control (signaling) protocol that handles the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet. SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP. BitTorrent is a free P2P (peer-to-peer) sharing tool allowing you to distribute large software and media files. BitTorrent requires you to search for a file with a searching engine yourself. It distributes files by corporation and trading, that is, the client downloads the file in small pieces and share the pieces with other peers to get other half of the file. Online gaming services lets you play multiplayer games on the Internet via broadband technology. As of this writing, your NBG5615 supports Xbox, Playstation, Battlenet and MSN Game Zone. NBG5615 Users Guide 171 Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management 172 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 21 Remote Management 21.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens. Remote Management allows you to manage your NBG5615 from a remote location through the following interfaces:

LAN and WAN

LAN only

WAN only Note: The NBG5615 is managed using the Web Configurator. 21.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the W W W screen to define the interface/s from which the NBG5615 can be managed remotely using the web and specify a secure client that can manage the NBG5615 (Section 21.4 on page 174).

Use the Telnet screen to define the interface/s from which the NBG5615 can be managed remotely using Telnet service and specify a secure client that can manage the NBG5615 (Section 21.5 on page 175).

Use the W ake On LAN screen to enable Wake on LAN and remotely turn on a device on the local network (Section 21.6 on page 175). 21.3 What You Need to Know Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when:

1 2 3 The IP address in the Secured Client I P Address field (Section 21.4 on page 174) does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the NBG5615 will disconnect the session immediately. There is already another remote management session. You may only have one remote management session running at one time. There is a firewall rule that blocks it. NBG5615 Users Guide 173 Chapter 21 Remote Management 21.3.1 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled:

Use the NBG5615s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN.

Use the NBG5615s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN. 21.3.2 System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The NBG5615 automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. You can change the timeout period in the Maint enance > General screen 21.4 WWW Screen To change your NBG5615s remote management settings, click Managem ent > Rem ot e MGMT >

W W W. Figure 102 Management > Remote Management > WWW The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 71 Management > Remote Management > WWW LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Access Status Secured Client IP Address You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NBG5615 using this service. Select All to allow all computes to access the NBG5615. Otherwise, check Select ed and specify the IP address of the computer that can access the NBG5615. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 174 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 21 Remote Management 21.5 Telnet Screen To change your NBG5615s remote management settings, click Managem ent > Rem ot e MGMT >

Telnet to open the Telnet screen. Figure 103 Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 72 Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Access Status Secured Client IP Address You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NBG5615 using this service. Select All to allow all computes to access the NBG5615. Otherwise, check Select ed and specify the IP address of the computer that can access the NBG5615. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 21.6 Wake On LAN Screen Wake On LAN (WoL) allows you to remotely turn on a device on the network, such as a computer, storage device or media server. To use this feature the remote hardware (for example the network adapter on a computer) must support Wake On LAN using the Magic Packet method. You need to know the MAC address of the remote device. It may be on a label on the device. NBG5615 Users Guide 175 Chapter 21 Remote Management Use this screen to remotely turn on a device on the network. Click the Managem ent > Rem ot e MGMT > W ake On LAN to open the following screen. Figure 104 Management > Remote MGMT > Wake On LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 73 Management > Remote MGMT > Wake On LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Wake On LAN over WAN Settings Enable WOL over WAN Port Wake On LAN Select this option to have the NBG5615 forward a WoL Magic Packet to all devices on the LAN if the packet comes from the WAN or remote network and uses the port number specified in the Port field. A LAN device whose hardware supports Wake on LAN then will be powered on if it is turned off previously. Type a port number from which a WoL packet is forwarded to the LAN. Wake MAC Address Enter the MAC Address of the device on the network that will be turned on. Start Apply Cancel A MAC address consists of six hexadecimal character pairs. Click this to have the NBG5615 generate a WoL packet and forward it to turn the specified device on. A screen pops up displaying MAC address error if you input the MAC address incorrectly. Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 176 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 22 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 22.1 Overview This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the web configurator. Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. 22.2 What You Need to Know UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. 22.2.1 NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

Dynamic port mapping

Learning public IP addresses

Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT. 22.2.2 Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the NBG5615 allows multicast messages on the LAN only. NBG5615 Users Guide 177 Chapter 22 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. 22.3 UPnP Screen Use this screen to enable UPnP on your NBG5615. Click Managem ent > UPnP to display the screen shown next. Figure 105 Management > UPnP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 74 Management > UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION UPnP Apply Cancel Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the NBG5615's IP address

(although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings. 22.4 Technical Reference The sections show examples of using UPnP. 22.4.1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the NBG5615. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the NBG5615. Turn on your computer and the NBG5615. 22.4.1.1 Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device 1 2 178 Click st art and Cont rol Panel. Double-click Net w ork Connect ions. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. Right-click the icon and select Propert ies. NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 106 Network Connections Chapter 22 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 3 In the I nt ernet Connect ion Propert ies window, click Set t ings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Figure 107 Internet Connection Properties 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Figure 108 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings NBG5615 Users Guide 179 Chapter 22 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Figure 109 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add Note: When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 5 Select Show icon in not ificat ion area w hen connect ed option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. Figure 110 System Tray Icon 6 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Figure 111 Internet Connection Status 22.4.2 Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the NBG5615 without finding out the IP address of the NBG5615 first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the NBG5615. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator. 1 Click St art and then Cont rol Panel. 2 Double-click N et w ork Connect ions. 180 NBG5615 Users Guide 3 Select My N et w ork Places under Ot her Places. Figure 112 Network Connections Chapter 22 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 4 5 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local N et w ork. Right-click on the icon for your NBG5615 and select I nvoke. The web configurator login screen displays. Figure 113 Network Connections: My Network Places 6 Right-click on the icon for your NBG5615 and select Propert ies. A properties window displays with basic information about the NBG5615. NBG5615 Users Guide 181 Chapter 22 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Figure 114 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example 182 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 23 USB Media Sharing 23.1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure the media sharing settings on the NBG5615. Note: The read and write performance may be affected by amount of file-sharing traffic on your network, type of connected USB device and your USB version (1.1 or 2.0). Media Server You can set up your NBG5615 to act as a media server to provide media (like video) to DLNA-

compliant players, such as Windows Media Player, ZyXEL DMAs (Digital Media Adapters), Xboxes or PS3s. The media server and clients must have IP addresses in the same subnet. The NBG5615 media server enables you to:

Publish all folders for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the NBG5615.

Use hardware-based media clients like the DMA-2500 to play the files. Note: Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published folders. No user name and password nor other form of security is required. The following figure is an overview of the NBG5615s media server feature. DLNA devices A and B can access and play files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the NBG5615 (D). Figure 115 Media Server Overview A B C D NBG5615 Users Guide 183 Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing File-Sharing Server You can also share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your NBG5615 with users on your network. The following figure is an overview of the NBG5615s file-sharing server feature. Computers A and B can access files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the NBG5615 (D). Figure 116 File Sharing Overview B A C D 23.2 What You Can Do

Use the DLN A screen to use the NBG5615 as a media server and allow DLNA-compliant devices to play media files stored in the attached USB device (Section 23.5 on page 186).

Use the SAMBA screen to enable file-sharing via the NBG5615 using Windows Explorer or the workgroup name. This screen also allow you to configure the workgroup name and create user accounts (Section 23.6 on page 186).

Use the FTP screen to allow file sharing via the NBG5615 using FTP and create user accounts

(Section 23.7 on page 188). 23.3 What You Need To Know DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a group of personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home network. DLNA clients play files stored on DLNA servers. The NBG5615 can function as a DLNA-compliant media server and stream files to DLNA-compliant media clients without any configuration. 184 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing Workgroup name This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files. Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network. File Systems A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device. Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems. The file-sharing feature on your NBG5615 supports New Technology File System (NTFS), File Allocation Table (FAT) and FAT32 file systems. Windows/CIFS Common Internet File System (CIFS) is a standard protocol supported by most operating systems in order to share files across the network. CIFS runs over TCP/IP but uses the SMB (Server Message Block) protocol found in Microsoft Windows for file and printer access; therefore, CIFS will allow all applications, not just Web browsers, to open and share files across the Internet. The NBG5615 uses Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol for its file sharing functions. CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the NBG5615. CIFS protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows, Linux Samba and other operating systems (refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility). Samba SMB is a client-server protocol used by Microsoft Windows systems for sharing files, printers, and so on. Samba is a free SMB server that runs on most Unix and Unix-like systems. It provides an implementation of an SMB client and server for use with non-Microsoft operating systems. File Transfer Protocol This is a method of transferring data from one computer to another over a network such as the Internet. 23.4 Before You Begin 1 2 Make sure the NBG5615 is connected to your network and turned on. Connect the USB device to one of the NBG5615s USB ports. The NBG5615 detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. NBG5615 Users Guide 185 Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by the NBG5615, see the troubleshooting for suggestions. 23.5 DLNA Screen Use this screen to have the NBG5615 act as a DLNA-compliant media server that lets DLNA-

compliant media clients on your network play video, music, and photos from the NBG5615 (without having to copy them to another computer). Click M anagem ent > USB Media Sharing > DLN A. Figure 117 Management > USB Media Sharing > DLNA The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 75 Management > USB Media Sharing > DLNA LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable DLNA Select this to have the NBG5615 function as a DLNA-compliant media server. USB1/2 Rescan Apply Cancel Select the media type that you want to share on the USB device connected to the NBG5615s USB port. Click this button to have the NBG5615 scan the media files on the connected USB device and do indexing of the file list again so that DLNA clients can find the new files if any. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 23.6 SAMBA Screen Use this screen to set up file-sharing via the NBG5615 using Windows Explorer or the workgroup name. You can also configure the workgroup name and create file-sharing user accounts. Click Managem ent > USB Media Sharing > SAMBA. 186 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 118 Management > USB Media Sharing > SAMBA Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 76 Management > USB Media Sharing > SAMBA LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable SAMBA Name Work Group Select this to enable file sharing through the NBG5615 using Windows Explorer or by browsing to your work group. Specify the name to identify the NBG5615 in a work group. You can add the NBG5615 to an existing or a new workgroup on your network. Enter the name of the workgroup which your NBG5615 automatically joins. You can set the NBG5615s workgroup name to be exactly the same as the workgroup name to which your computer belongs to. Decription USB1/2 Note: The NBG5615 will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your network administrator. Enter the description of the NBG5615 in a work group. Specify the users access rights to the USB storage device which is connected to the NBG5615s USB port. Read & W rite - The user has read and write rights, meaning that the user can create and edit the files on the connected USB device. Read - The user has read rights only and can not create or edit the files on the connected USB device. User Accounts Before you can share files you need a user account. Configure the following fields to set up a file-sharing account.

This is the index number of the user account. NBG5615 Users Guide 187 Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing Table 76 Management > USB Media Sharing > SAMBA (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable User Name Password USB1/2 Apply Cancel This field displays whether a user account is activated or not. Select the check box to enable the account. Clear the check box to disable the account. Enter a user name that will be allowed to access the shared files. You can enter up to 20 characters. Only letters and numbers allowed. Enter the password used to access the shared files. You can enter up to 20 characters. Only letters and numbers are allowed. The password is case sensitive. Select the USB port(s) of the NBG5615. The configured user can access the files on the USB device(s) connected to the selected USB port(s) only. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 23.7 FTP Screen Use this screen to set up file sharing via the NBG5615 using FTP and create user accounts. Click Managem ent > USB Media Sharing > FTP. Figure 119 Management > USB Media Sharing > FTP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 77 Management > USB Media Sharing > FTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable FTP Select this to enable the FTP server on the NBG5615 for file sharing using FTP. Port You may change the server port number for FTP if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for file sharing. User Accounts Before you can share files you need a user account. Configure the following fields to set up a file-sharing account.

This is the index number of the user account. 188 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing Table 77 Management > USB Media Sharing > FTP (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable User Name Password USB1/2 Upstream Bandwidth Downstream Bandwidth Apply Cancel This field displays whether a user account is activated or not. Select the check box to enable the account. Clear the check box to disable the account. Enter a user name that will be allowed to access the shared files. You can enter up to 20 characters. Only letters and numbers allowed. Enter the password used to access the shared files. You can enter up to 20 characters. Only letters and numbers are allowed. The password is case sensitive. Specify the users access rights to the USB storage device which is connected to the NBG5615s USB port. Read & W rite - The user has read and write rights, meaning that the user can create and edit the files on the connected USB device. Read - The user has read rights only and can not create or edit the files on the connected USB device. N one - The user cannot access the files on the USB device(s) connected to the USB port. Enter the maximum bandwidth (in Kbps) allowed for incoming FTP traffic. Enter the maximum bandwidth (in Kbps) allowed for outgoing FTP traffic. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 23.8 Example of Accessing Your Shared Files From a Computer You can use Windows Explorer or FTP to access the USB storage devices connected to the NBG5615. This example shows you how to use Microsofts Windows XP to browse your shared files. Refer to your operating systems documentation for how to browse your file structure. 23.8.1 Use Windows Explorer to Share Files You should have enabled file sharing and create a user account (Bob/1234 for example) with read and write access to USB 1 in the USB Media Sharing > SAMBA screen. Open Windows Explorer to access the connected USB device using either Windows Explorer browser or by browsing to your workgroup. NBG5615 Users Guide 189 Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing 1 In Windows Explorers Address bar type a double backslash \\ followed by the IP address of the NBG5615 (the default IP address of the NBG5615 in router mode is 192.168.1.1) and press

[ENTER]. A screen asking for password authentication appears. Type the user name and password

(Bob and 1234 in this example) and click OK. Note: Once you log into the shared folder via your NBG5615, you do not have to relogin unless you restart your computer. 190 NBG5615 Users Guide 2 You can also use the workgroup name to access files by browsing to the workgroup folder using the folder tree on the left side of the screen. It is located under My N et w ork Places. In this example the workgroup name is the default Workgroup. Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing 23.8.2 Use FTP to Share Files You can use FTP to access the USB storage devices connected to the NBG5615. In this example, we use the web browser to share files via FTP from the LAN. The way or screen you log into the FTP server (on the NBG5615) varies depending on your FTP client. See your FTP client documentation for more information. You should have enabled file sharing and create a user account (Bob/1234 for example) with read and write access to USB 1 in the USB Media Sharing > FTP screen. 1 In your web browsers address or URL bar type ftp:// followed by the IP address of the NBG5615

(the default LAN IP address of the NBG5615 in router mode is 192.168.1.1) and click Go or press

[ENTER]. NBG5615 Users Guide 191 Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing 2 A screen asking for password authentication appears. Enter the user name and password (you configured in the USB Media Sharing > FTP screen) and click Log On. 3 The screen changes and shows you the folder for the USB storage device connected to your NBG5615. Double-click the folder to display the contents in it. 192 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 24 Maintenance 24.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Maint enance screens. 24.2 What You Can Do

Use the General screen to set the timeout period of the management session (Section 24.3 on page 193).

Use the Passw ord screen to change your NBG5615s system password (Section 24.4 on page 194).

Use the Tim e screen to change your NBG5615s time and date (Section 24.5 on page 195).

Use the Firm w are Upgrade screen to upload firmware to your NBG5615 (Section 24.6 on page 196).

Use the Backup/ Rest ore screen to view information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration (Section 24.8 on page 199).

Use the Rest art screen to reboot the NBG5615 without turning the power off (Section 24.8 on page 199).

Use the Language screen to change the language for the Web Configurator (Section 24.9 on page 199) .

Use the Sys OP Mode screen to select how you want to use your NBG5615 (Section 24.11 on page 201). 24.3 General Screen Use this screen to set the management session timeout period. Click Maint enance > General. The following screen displays. Figure 120 Maintenance > General NBG5615 Users Guide 193 Chapter 24 Maintenance The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 78 Maintenance > General LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG5615 in an Ethernet network. Domain Name Enter the domain name you want to give to the NBG5615. Administrator Inactivity Timer Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the session times out. The default is 5 minutes. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended). Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 24.4 Password Screen It is strongly recommended that you change your NBG5615's password. If you forget your NBG5615's password (or IP address), you will need to reset the device. See Section 24.8 on page 199 for details. Click Maint enance > Passw ord. The screen appears as shown. Figure 121 Maintenance > Password The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 79 Maintenance > Password LABEL DESCRIPTION Password Setup Change your NBG5615s password (recommended) using the fields as shown. Old Password New Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays an asterisk (*) for each character you type. Retype to Confirm Type the new password again in this field. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 194 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 24 Maintenance 24.5 Time Setting Screen Use this screen to configure the NBG5615s time based on your local time zone. To change your NBG5615s time and date, click Maint enance > Tim e. The screen appears as shown. Figure 122 Maintenance > Time The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 80 Maintenance > Time LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time and Date Current Time This field displays the time of your NBG5615. Each time you reload this page, the NBG5615 synchronizes the time with the time server. Current Date This field displays the date of your NBG5615. Each time you reload this page, the NBG5615 synchronizes the date with the time server. Current Time and Date Manual New Time

(hh:mm:ss) Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it. This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually. When you select Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply. NBG5615 Users Guide 195 Chapter 24 Maintenance Table 80 Maintenance > Time (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION New Date

(yyyy/mm/dd) This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually. When you select Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply. Get from Time Server Select this radio button to have the NBG5615 get the time and date from the time server you specified below. User Defined Time Server Address Select User Defined Tim e Server Address and enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Time Zone Setup Time Zone Daylight Savings Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings. The at field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and select 2 in the at field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you select in the at field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings. The at field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First , Sunday, N ovem ber and select 2 in the at field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, Oct ober. The time you select in the at field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 24.6 Firmware Upgrade Screen Find firmware at www.zyxel.com in a file that uses the version number and project code with a

*.bin extension, e.g., V1.00(AAGI.0).bin. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. 196 NBG5615 Users Guide Click Maint enance > Firm w are Upgrade. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your NBG5615. Figure 123 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade Chapter 24 Maintenance The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 81 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Browse... Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Brow se... to find it. Click Brow se... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. Check for Latest Firmware Now Click this to check for the latest updated firmware. Note: Do not turn off the NBG5615 while firmware upload is in progress!

After you see the Firm w are Upload I n Process screen, wait two minutes before logging into the NBG5615 again. The NBG5615 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 124 Network Temporarily Disconnected After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the St at us screen. If the upload was not successful, an error message appears. Click Ret urn to go back to the Firm w are Upgrade screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 197 Chapter 24 Maintenance 24.7 Configuration Backup/Restore Screen Backup configuration allows you to back up (save) the NBG5615s current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your NBG5615 is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your NBG5615. Click Maint enance > Backup/ Rest ore. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears as shown next. Figure 125 Maintenance > Backup/Restore The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 82 Maintenance > Backup/Restore LABEL DESCRIPTION Backup File Path Browse... Click Back up to save the NBG5615s current configuration to your computer. Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Brow se... to find it. Click Brow se... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. 198 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 24 Maintenance Table 82 Maintenance > Backup/Restore (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. Note: Do not turn off the NBG5615 while configuration file upload is in progress. After you see a configuration upload successful screen, you must then wait one minute before logging into the NBG5615 again. The NBG5615 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. If you see an error screen, click Back to return to the Backup/Restore screen. Reset Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user-entered configuration information and returns the NBG5615 to its factory defaults. You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your NBG5615. Refer to the chapter about introducing the Web Configurator for more information on the RESET button. Note: If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default NBG5615 IP address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix B on page 221 for details on how to set up your computers IP address. 24.8 Restart Screen System restart allows you to reboot the NBG5615 without turning the power off. Click Maint enance > Rest art to open the following screen. Figure 126 Maintenance > Restart Click Rest art to have the NBG5615 reboot. This does not affect the NBG5615's configuration. 24.9 Language Screen Use this screen to change the language for the Web Configurator. Select the language you prefer and click Apply. The Web Configurator language changes after a while without restarting the NBG5615. NBG5615 Users Guide 199 Chapter 24 Maintenance Figure 127 Maintenance > Language 24.10 System Operation Mode Overview The Sys OP Mode (System Operation Mode) function lets you configure your NBG5615 as a router or access point. You can choose between Rout er Mode, and Access Point Mode depending on your network topology and the features you require from your device. The following describes the device modes available in your NBG5615. Router A router connects your local network with another network, such as the Internet. The router has two IP addresses, the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address. Figure 128 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode Access Point An access point enabled all ethernet ports to be bridged together and be in the same subnet. To connect to the Internet, another device, such as a router, is required. 200 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 129 Access Point Mode Chapter 24 Maintenance 24.11 Sys OP Mode Screen Use this screen to select how you want to use your NBG5615. Figure 130 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode The following table describes the labels in the General screen. Table 83 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Mode Router Mode Select Rout er Mode if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet. This mode offers services such as a firewall or bandwidth management. You can configure the IP address settings on your WAN port. Contact your ISP or system administrator for more information on appropriate settings. NBG5615 Users Guide 201 Chapter 24 Maintenance Table 83 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Access Point Mode Select Access Point M ode if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network. In Access Point M ode, all Ethernet ports have the same IP address.

All ports on the rear panel of the device are LAN ports, including the port labeled WAN. There is no WAN port. The DHCP server on your device is disabled.

Router functions (such as NAT, bandwidth management, remote management, firewall and so on) are not available when the NBG5615 is in Access Point Mode. The IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192.168.1.2.

Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your settings. Click Cancel to return your settings to the default (Rout er). Note: If you select the incorrect system operation Mode you may not be able to connect to the Internet. 202 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 25 Troubleshooting 25.1 Overview This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories.

Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs

NBG5615 Access and Login

Internet Access

Resetting the NBG5615 to Its Factory Defaults

Wireless Connections

USB Device Problems

ZyXEL Share Center Utility Problems 25.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The NBG5615 does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NBG5615. 2 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NBG5615 and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 3 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG5615. 4 If the problem continues, contact the vendor. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.7 on page 18. 2 3 Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide. Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. NBG5615 Users Guide 203 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 4 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor to the NBG5615. 5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor. 25.3 NBG5615 Access and Login I dont know the IP address of my NBG5615. 1 2 3 4 The default IP address of the NBG5615 in Rout er Mode is 1 9 2 .1 6 8 .1 .1 . The default IP address of the NBG5615 in Access Point Mode is 1 9 2 .1 6 8 .1 .2 . If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the NBG5615 in Rout er Mode by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click St art > Run, enter cm d, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gat ew ay might be the IP address of the NBG5615 (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. If your NBG5615 in Access Point Mode is a DHCP client, you can find your IP address from the DHCP server. This information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network. Find this information directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more information. Reset your NBG5615 to change all settings back to their default. This means your current settings are lost. See Section 25.5 on page 207 in the Troubleshoot ing for information on resetting your NBG5615. I forgot the password. 1 2 The default password is 1 2 3 4 . If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 25.5 on page 207. I cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address.

The default IP address of the NBG5615 in Rout er Mode is 1 9 2 .1 6 8 .1 .1 . The default IP address of the NBG5615 in Access Point Mode is 1 9 2 .1 6 8 .1 .2 .

If you changed the IP address (Section 13.4 on page 130), use the new IP address.

If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I dont know the IP address of my NBG5615. 204 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScript and Java enabled. See Appendix A on page 211. 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NBG5615. (If you know that there are routers between your computer and the NBG5615, skip this step.)

If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address. See Section 13.4 on page 130.

If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computers IP address is in the same subnet as the NBG5615. See Section 13.4 on page 130. 5 6 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the NBG5615 with the default IP address. See Section 1.5 on page 16. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggest ions

Try to access the NBG5615 using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the NBG5615, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the NBG5615 does not respond to HTTP.

If your computer is connected to the W AN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a LAN /ETHERN ET port. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the NBG5615. 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default password is 1 2 3 4 . This field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 This can happen when you fail to log out properly from your last session. Try logging in again after 5 minutes. 3 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG5615. 4 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 25.5 on page 207. 25.4 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. NBG5615 Users Guide 205 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 2 Go to Maint enance > Sys OP Mode. Check your System Operation Mode setting.

If the NBG5615 is in Rout er Mode, make sure the WAN port is connected to a broadband modem or router with Internet access. Your computer and the NBG5615 should be in the same subnet.

If the NBG5615 is in Access Point Mode, make sure the WAN port is connected to a broadband modem or router with Internet access and your computer is set to obtain an dynamic IP address. 3 4 If the NBG5615 is in Rout er Mode, make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard or the WAN screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP. 5 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again. 6 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the NBG5615), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. 1 2 3 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.7 on page 18. Reboot the NBG5615. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. The Internet connection is slow or intermittent. 1 2 3 4 206 There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 1.7 on page 18. If the NBG5615 is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving the NBG5615 closer to the AP if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on). Reboot the NBG5615. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggest ion NBG5615 Users Guide

Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 25.5 Resetting the NBG5615 to Its Factory Defaults If you reset the NBG5615, you lose all of the changes you have made. The NBG5615 re-loads its default settings, and the password resets to 1 2 3 4 . You have to make all of your changes again. You will lose all of your changes when you push the RESET button. To reset the NBG5615:

1 Make sure the power LED is on. 2 3 Press the RESET button for one to four seconds to restart/reboot the NBG5615. Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG5615 back to its factory-default configurations. If the NBG5615 restarts automatically, wait for the NBG5615 to finish restarting, and log in to the Web Configurator. The password is 1234. If the NBG5615 does not restart automatically, disconnect and reconnect the NBG5615s power. Then, follow the directions above again. 25.6 Wireless Connections I cannot access the NBG5615 or ping any computer from the WLAN. 1 Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the NBG5615. 2 Make sure the wireless adapter on your computer is working properly. 3 Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802.11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the NBG5615. 4 Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the transmission range of the NBG5615. 5 Check that both the NBG5615 and the wireless adapter on your computer are using the same wireless and wireless security settings. 6 Make sure traffic between the WLAN and the LAN is not blocked by the firewall on the NBG5615. NBG5615 Users Guide 207 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 7 Make sure you allow the NBG5615 to be remotely accessed through the WLAN interface. Check your remote management settings.

See the chapter on Wireless LAN in the Users Guide for more information. I set up URL keyword blocking, but I can still access a website that should be blocked. Make sure that you select the Enable URL Keyw ord Blocking check box in the Content Filtering screen. Make sure that the keywords that you type are listed in the Keyw ord List . If a keyword that is listed in the Keyw ord List is not blocked when it is found in a URL, customize the keyword blocking using commands. See the Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking section in the Content Filtering chapter. I cannot access the Web Configurator after I switched to AP mode. When you change from router mode to AP mode, your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192.168.1.3 and 192.168.1.254. Refer to Appendix B on page 221 for instructions on how to change your computers IP address. What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this problem?

The following factors may cause interference:

Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on.

Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs.

Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless devices. To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:

Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low.

Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones.

Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and the wireless client.

Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add additional APs if necessary.

Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open that use the Internet. 208 NBG5615 Users Guide

Position the antennas for best reception. If the AP is placed on a table or floor, point the antennas upwards. If the AP is placed at a high position, point the antennas downwards. Try pointing the antennas in different directions and check which provides the strongest signal to the wireless clients. Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 25.7 USB Device Problems I cannot access or see a USB device that is connected to the NBG5615. 1 Be sure to install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility (for NetUSB functionality) first from the included disc, or download the latest version from the zyxel.com website. 2 Disconnect the problematic USB device, then reconnect it to the NBG5615. 3 4 5 6 Ensure that the USB device has power. Check your cable connections. Restart the NBG5615 by disconnecting the power and then reconnecting it. If the USB device requires a special driver, install the driver from the installation disc that came with the device. After driver installation, reconnect the USB device to the NBG5615 and try to connect to it again with your computer. 7 If the problem persists, contact your vendor. What kind of USB devices do the NBG5615 support?

1 It is strongly recommended to use version 2.0 or lower USB storage devices (such as memory sticks, USB hard drives) and/or USB devices (such as USB printers). Other USB products are not guaranteed to function properly with the NBG5615. 25.8 ZyXEL Share Center Utility Problems I cannot access or see a USB device that is connected to the NBG5615. 1 Disconnect the problematic USB device, then reconnect it to the NBG5615. 2 Ensure that the USB device in question has power. NBG5615 Users Guide 209 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 3 4 5 Check your cable connections. Restart the NBG5615 by disconnecting the power and then reconnecting it. If the USB device requires a special driver, install the driver from the installation disc that came with the device. After driver installation, reconnect the USB device to the NBG5615 and try to connect to it again with your computer. 6 If the problem persists, contact your vendor. I cannot install the ZyXEL Share Center Utility. 1 Make sure that the set up program is one required for your operating system. 2 3 Install the latest patches and updates for your operating system. Check the zyxel.com download site for a newer version of the utility. 210 NBG5615 Users Guide A PPENDIX A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device.

JavaScript (enabled by default).

Java permissions (enabled by default). Note: The screens used below belong to Internet Explorer version 6, 7 and 8. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary. Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your devices IP address. Disable Pop-up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop- up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop- up Blocker. Figure 131 Pop-up Blocker You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop- up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. 1 2 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, I nt ernet Opt ions, Privacy. Clear the Block pop- ups check box in the Pop- up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. NBG5615 Users Guide 211 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Figure 132 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Click Apply to save this setting. Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 1 2 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, I nt ernet Opt ions and then the Privacy tab. Select Set t ingsto open the Pop- up Blocker Set t ings screen. 212 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Figure 133 Internet Options: Privacy 3 4 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.167.1. Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allow ed sit es. Figure 134 Pop-up Blocker Settings NBG5615 Users Guide 213 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 5 6 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. Click Apply to save this setting. JavaScript If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScript are allowed. 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, I nt ernet Opt ions and then the Securit y tab. Figure 135 Internet Options: Security 2 3 Click the Cust om Level... button. Scroll down to Script ing. 4 Under Act ive script ing make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 5 Under Script ing of Java applet s make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 6 Click OK to close the window. 214 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Figure 136 Security Settings - Java Scripting Java Permissions 1 2 3 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, I nt ernet Opt ions and then the Securit y tab. Click the Cust om Level... button. Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 4 Under Java perm issions make sure that a safety level is selected. 5 Click OK to close the window. NBG5615 Users Guide 215 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Figure 137 Security Settings - Java JAVA (Sun) 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, I nt ernet Opt ions and then the Advanced tab. 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for < applet > under Java ( Sun) is selected. 3 Click OK to close the window. Figure 138 Java (Sun) 216 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary slightly. The steps below apply to Mozilla Firefox 3.0 as well. You can enable Java, Javascript and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Opt ions in the screen that appears. Figure 139 Mozilla Firefox: TOOLS > Options Click Cont ent to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. Figure 140 Mozilla Firefox Content Security NBG5615 Users Guide 217 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Opera Opera 10 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary slightly. Allowing Pop-Ups From Opera, click Tools, then Preferences. In the General tab, go to Choose how you prefer t o handle pop- ups and select Open all pop- ups. Figure 141 Opera: Allowing Pop-Ups Enabling Java From Opera, click Tools, then Preferences. In the Advanced tab, select Cont ent from the left-

side menu. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. 218 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Figure 142 Opera: Enabling Java To customize JavaScript behavior in the Opera browser, click JavaScript Opt ions. Figure 143 Opera: JavaScript Options Select the items you want Operas JavaScript to apply. NBG5615 Users Guide 219 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 220 NBG5615 Users Guide A PPENDIX B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Note: Your specific NBG5615 may not support all of the operating systems described in this appendix. See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported. This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network. Windows Vista/XP/2000, Mac OS 9/

OS X, and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP/IP on your computer. If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP, make sure that your networks computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet. In this appendix, you can set up an IP address for:

Windows XP/NT/2000 on page 221

Windows Vista on page 225

Windows 7 on page 229

Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 on page 233

Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6 on page 236

Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) on page 239

Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) on page 243 Windows XP/NT/2000 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT. 1 Click St art > Cont rol Panel. NBG5615 Users Guide 221 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 2 In the Cont rol Panel, click the N et w ork Connect ions icon. 3 Right-click Local Area Connect ion and then select Propert ies. 4 On the General tab, select I nt ernet Prot ocol ( TCP/ I P) and then click Propert ies. 222 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 The I nt ernet Prot ocol TCP/ I P Propert ies window opens. NBG5615 Users Guide 223 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 6 Select Obt ain an I P address aut om at ically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use t he follow ing I P Address and fill in the I P address, Subnet m ask, and Default gat ew ay fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DN S server and an Alt ernat e DN S server, if that information was provided. 7 8 Click OK to close the I nt ernet Prot ocol ( TCP/ I P) Propert ies window. Click OK to close the Local Area Connect ion Propert ies window. Verifying Settings 1 2 224 Click St art > All Program s > Accessories > Com m and Prom pt . In the Com m and Prom pt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also go to St art > Cont rol Panel > Net w ork Connect ions, right-click a network connection, click St at us and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information. NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional. 1 Click St art > Cont rol Panel. 2 In the Cont rol Panel, click the N et w ork and I nt ernet icon. 3 Click the N et w ork and Sharing Cent er icon. 4 Click Manage net w ork connect ions. NBG5615 Users Guide 225 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 Right-click Local Area Connect ion and then select Propert ies. Note: During this procedure, click Cont inue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. 6 Select I nt ernet Prot ocol Version 4 ( TCP/ I Pv4 ) and then select Propert ies. 226 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 7 The I nt ernet Prot ocol Version 4 ( TCP/ I Pv4 ) Propert ies window opens. NBG5615 Users Guide 227 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 8 Select Obt ain an I P address aut om at ically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use t he follow ing I P Address and fill in the I P address, Subnet m ask, and Default gat ew ay fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DN S server and an Alt ernat e DN S server, if that information was provided.Click Advanced. 9 Click OK to close the I nt ernet Prot ocol ( TCP/ I P) Propert ies window. 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connect ion Propert ies window. Verifying Settings 1 2 228 Click St art > All Program s > Accessories > Com m and Prom pt . In the Com m and Prom pt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also go to St art > Cont rol Panel > Net w ork Connect ions, right-click a network connection, click St at us and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information. NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Windows 7 This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise. 1 Click St art > Cont rol Panel. 2 In the Cont rol Panel, click View net w ork st at us and t asks under the N et w ork and I nt ernet category. 3 Click Change adapt er set t ings. 4 Double click Local Area Connect ion and then select Propert ies. NBG5615 Users Guide 229 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Note: During this procedure, click Cont inue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. 5 Select I nt ernet Prot ocol Version 4 ( TCP/ I Pv4 ) and then select Propert ies. 230 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 6 The I nt ernet Prot ocol Version 4 ( TCP/ I Pv4 ) Propert ies window opens. NBG5615 Users Guide 231 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 7 Select Obt ain an I P address aut om at ically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use t he follow ing I P Address and fill in the I P address, Subnet m ask, and Default gat ew ay fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DN S server and an Alt ernat e DN S server, if that information was provided. Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP, DNS and WINS. 8 9 Click OK to close the I nt ernet Prot ocol ( TCP/ I P) Propert ies window. Click OK to close the Local Area Connect ion Propert ies window. Verifying Settings Click St art > All Program s > Accessories > Com m and Prom pt . In the Com m and Prom pt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. The IP settings are displayed as follows. 1 2 3 232 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.4 but can also apply to 10.3. 1 Click Apple > Syst em Preferences. 2 In the Syst em Preferences window, click the N et w ork icon. NBG5615 Users Guide 233 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 When the N et w ork preferences pane opens, select Built - in Et hernet from the network connection type list, and then click Configure. 4 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure I Pv4 list in the TCP/ I P tab. 234 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 For statically assigned settings, do the following:

From the Configure I Pv4 list, select Manually.

In the I P Address field, type your IP address.

In the Subnet Mask field, type your subnet mask.

In the Rout er field, type the IP address of your device. 6 Click Apply Now and close the window. Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applicat ions > Ut ilit ies > N et w ork Ut ilit ies, and then selecting the appropriate N et w ork I nt erface from the I nfo tab. NBG5615 Users Guide 235 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Figure 144 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Utility Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.5 but can also apply to 10.6. 1 Click Apple > Syst em Preferences. 2 In Syst em Preferences, click the N et w ork icon. 236 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 When the N et w ork preferences pane opens, select Et hernet from the list of available connection types. 4 From the Configure list, select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings. NBG5615 Users Guide 237 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 For statically assigned settings, do the following:

From the Configure list, select Manually.

In the I P Address field, enter your IP address.

In the Subnet Mask field, enter your subnet mask.

In the Rout er field, enter the IP address of your NBG5615. 6 Click Apply and close the window. Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applicat ions > Ut ilit ies > N et w ork Ut ilit ies, and then selecting the appropriate N et w ork int erface from the I nfo tab. 238 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 145 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Utility Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment (GNOME) using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME:

1 Click Syst em > Adm inist rat ion > N et w ork. 2 When the N et w ork Set t ings window opens, click Unlock to open the Aut hent icat e window. (By default, the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked.) You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password. NBG5615 Users Guide 239 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 In the Aut hent icat e window, enter your admin account name and password then click the Aut hent icat e button. 4 In the N et w ork Set t ings window, select the connection that you want to configure, then click Propert ies. 240 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 The Propert ies dialog box opens.

In the Configurat ion list, select Aut om at ic Configurat ion ( DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address.

In the Configurat ion list, select St at ic I P address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the I P address, Subnet m ask, and Gat ew ay address fields. 6 7 Click OK to save the changes and close the Propert ies dialog box and return to the N et w ork Set t ings screen. If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DN S tab in the N et w ork Set t ings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. NBG5615 Users Guide 241 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 8 Click the Close button to apply the changes. Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Syst em > Adm inist rat ion > N et w ork Tools, and then selecting the appropriate N et w ork device from the Devices tab. The I nt erface St at ist ics column shows data if your connection is working properly. 242 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 146 Ubuntu 8: Network Tools Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in the K Desktop Environment (KDE) using the openSUSE 10.3 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default openSUSE 10.3 installation. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE:

1 Click K Menu > Com put er > Adm inist rat or Set t ings ( YaST) . NBG5615 Users Guide 243 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 2 When the Run as Root - KDE su dialog opens, enter the admin password and click OK. 3 When the YaST Cont rol Cent er window opens, select N et w ork Devices and then click the N et w ork Card icon. 244 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 4 When the N et w ork Set t ings window opens, click the Overview tab, select the appropriate connection N am e from the list, and then click the Configure button. 5 When the N et w ork Card Set up window opens, click the Address tab NBG5615 Users Guide 245 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Figure 147 openSUSE 10.3: Network Card Setup 6 Select Dynam ic Address ( DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address. Select St at ically assigned I P Address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the I P address, Subnet m ask, and Host nam e fields. 7 8 Click N ext to save the changes and close the N et w ork Card Set up window. If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the Host nam e/ DN S tab in N et w ork Set t ings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. 246 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 9 Click Finish to save your settings and close the window. Verifying Settings Click the KN et w ork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP/IP properties. From the Opt ions sub-menu, select Show Connect ion I nform at ion. Figure 148 openSUSE 10.3: KNetwork Manager When the Connect ion St at us - KN et w ork Manager window opens, click the St at ist ics t ab to see if your connection is working properly. NBG5615 Users Guide 247 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Figure 149 openSUSE: Connection Status - KNetwork Manager 248 NBG5615 Users Guide A PPENDIX C Common Services The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. For a comprehensive list of port numbers, ICMP type/code numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) web site.

N am e: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like.

Prot ocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/ UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER- DEFI N ED, the Port ( s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number.

Port ( s) : This value depends on the Prot ocol. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers.

If the Prot ocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/ UDP, this is the IP port number.

If the Prot ocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.

Descript ion: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used. Table 84 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION User-Defined 51 AH

(IPSEC_TUNNEL) AIM/New-ICQ AUTH BGP BOOTP_CLIENT BOOTP_SERVER CU-SEEME TCP TCP TCP UDP UDP TCP UDP DNS TCP/UDP ESP

(IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined FINGER FTP H.323 TCP TCP TCP TCP The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. AOLs Internet Messenger service. It is also used as a listening port by ICQ. Authentication protocol used by some servers. Border Gateway Protocol. DHCP Client. DHCP Server. A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (for example www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. 5190 113 179 68 67 7648 24032 53 50 79 20 21 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol. NBG5615 Users Guide 249 Appendix C Common Services Table 84 Commonly Used Services (continued) NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) 80 443 1 4000 2 500 6667 1863 5190 144 2049 119 HTTP HTTPS ICMP ICQ TCP TCP User-Defined UDP IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined IKE IRC UDP TCP/UDP MSN Messenger TCP NEW-ICQ NEWS NFS NNTP PING POP3 PPTP PPTP_TUNNEL

(GRE) RCMD REAL_AUDIO REXEC RLOGIN RTELNET RTSP TCP TCP UDP TCP User-Defined 1 TCP TCP 110 1723 User-Defined 47 TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP 512 7070 514 513 107 554 DESCRIPTION Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/

server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce. Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes. This is a popular Internet chat program. Internet Group Management Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management. This is another popular Internet chat program. Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. An Internet chat program. A protocol for news groups. Network File System - NFS is a client/

server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol. 250 NBG5615 Users Guide Table 84 Commonly Used Services (continued) NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) SMTP TCP 25 SNMP SNMP-TRAPS SQL-NET TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP SSH STRM WORKS SYSLOG TACACS TELNET TCP/UDP UDP UDP UDP TCP TFTP UDP 161 162 1521 22 1558 514 49 23 69 Appendix C Common Services DESCRIPTION Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215). Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/

IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP (Transmission Control Protocol). VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution. NBG5615 Users Guide 251 Appendix C Common Services 252 NBG5615 Users Guide A PPENDIX D Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2012 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Trademarks NetUSB is a trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference.

This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. 1 2 3 4 FCC Radiation Exposure Statement

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11n (20MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. IEEE 802.11n (40MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 3 through 9.

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Industry Canada Statement This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause interference and 2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum gain of 2dBi. Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful communication. IC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. NBG5615 Users Guide 253 Appendix D Legal Information

Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Viewing Certifications Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this products documentation and certifications. ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. Open Source Licenses This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact support@zyxel.com.tw to get it. Regulatory Information European Union The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union. Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) Compliance Information for 2.4GHz and 5GHz Wireless Products Relevant to the EU and Other Countries Following the EU Directive 1999/5/EC

(R&TTE Directive)

[Czech]

[Danish]

[German]

[Estonian]

English

[Spanish]

ZyXEL tmto prohlauje, e tento zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/EC. Undertegnede ZyXEL erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Hiermit erklrt ZyXEL, dass sich das Gert Ausstattung in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Hereby, ZyXEL declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. 254 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix D Legal Information

ZyXEL

1999/5/C. Par la prsente ZyXEL dclare que l'appareil quipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC. Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. noteikumiem. Ar o ZyXEL deklar, ka iekrtas atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem iuo ZyXEL deklaruoja, kad is ranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, jiddikjara li dan tagmir jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Alulrott, ZyXEL nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezs megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EK irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Niniejszym ZyXEL owiadcza, e sprzt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL declara que este equipamento est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenia spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL vakuuttaa tten ett laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EC.

ZyXEL ,

1999/5/C. Hr me lsir, ZyXEL v yfir a essi bnaur er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og nnur vieigandi kvi tilskipunar 1999/5/EC. Erklrer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I direktiv 1999/5/EF. Prin prezenta, ZyXEL declar c acest echipament este n conformitate cu cerinele eseniale i alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC.

[Greek]

[French]

[Italian]

[Latvian]

[Lithuanian]

[Dutch]

[Maltese]

[Hungarian]

[Polish]

[Portuguese]

[Slovenian]

[Slovak]

[Finnish]

[Swedish]

[Bulgarian]

[Icelandic]

[Norwegian]

[Romanian]

National Restrictions This product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below:

Ce produit peut tre utilis dans tous les pays de lUE (et dans tous les pays ayant transposs la directive 1999/5/CE) sans aucune limitation, except pour les pays mentionns ci-dessous:

Questo prodotto utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU (ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttive EU 1999/5/EC) senza nessuna limitazione, eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito:

Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschrnkungen eingesetzt werden (sowie in anderen Staaten die der EU Direktive 1995/5/CE folgen) mit Aunahme der folgenden aufgefhrten Staaten:

In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2, 4- and 5-GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries inwhich additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable. The requirements for any country may evolve. ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for both the 2,4- and 5-GHz wireless LANs. The following countries have restrictions and/or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled Overview of Regulat ory Requirem ent s for Wireless LANs:. Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs Frequency Band (MHz) Max Power Level

(EIRP)1 (mW) Indoor ONLY Indoor and Outdoor 2400-2483.5 5150-5350 5470-5725 100 200 1000 V V V NBG5615 Users Guide 255 Appendix D Legal Information Belgium The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details. Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens. Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extrieur dune distance suprieure 300 mtres doivent tre notifies lInstitut Belge des services Postaux et des Tlcommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples dtails. Denmark In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage. I Danmark m frekvensbndet 5150 - 5350 ogs anvendes udendrs. Italy This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a general authorization. Please check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details. Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una Autorizzazione Generale. Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli. Latvia The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please check http://

www.esd.lv for more details. 2.4 GHz frekvenu joslas izmantoanai rpus telpm nepiecieama atauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairk informcijas: http://www.esd.lv. Notes:

1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in those countries. 2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used(specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm). List of national codes COUNTRY Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Safety Warnings ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE AT BE CY CR DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IE IT LV LT LU Malta Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden United Kingdom Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Switzerland Bulgaria Romania Turkey MT NL PL PT SK SI ES SE GB IS LI NO CH BG RO TR

Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.

Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.

Do NOT store things on the device.

Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.

Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.

Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.

Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.

Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.

Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.

Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe).

Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord.

Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.

If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the power outlet. 256 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix D Legal Information

Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.

Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.

Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged.

Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. NBG5615 Users Guide 257 Appendix D Legal Information 258 NBG5615 Users Guide Index Index D Daylight saving 196 DDNS 149 see also Dynamic DNS service providers 149 DHCP 90, 133 DHCP server see also Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server 130, 133 Digital Living Network Alliance 184 disclaimer 253 DLNA 183, 184 indexing 186 overview 183 rescan 186 DLNA-compliant client 184 DNS 135 DNS Server 96 DNS server 135 documentation related 2 Domain Name System 135 Domain Name System. See DNS. duplex setting 60, 69 Dynamic DNS 149 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 133 DynDNS 149 DynDNS see also DDNS 149 E encryption 107 and local (user) database 108 key 108 WPA compatible 108 ESSID 207 A ActiveX 162 Address Assignment 96 AP 15 AP Mode menu 69 status screen 67 AP+Bridge 15 B Bandwidth management overview 165 priority 167 services 171 BitTorrent 171 Bridge/Repeater 15 C certifications 253 notices 254 viewing 254 Channel 59, 68 channel 106 CIFS 185 Common Internet File System, see CIFS Configuration restore 198 content filtering 161 by keyword (in URL) 161 Cookies 162 copyright 253 CPU usage 60, 68 NBG5615 Users Guide 259 Index F FCC interference statement 253 file sharing 184 access right 187, 189 bandwidth 189 example 189 FTP 188 overview 184 Samba 186 user account 187, 188 Windows Explorer 186 work group 186 File Transfer Program 171 Firewall 156 Firewall overview guidelines 156 ICMP packets 157 network security Stateful inspection 156 ZyXEL device firewall 156 firewall stateful inspection 155 Firmware upload 196 file extension using HTTP firmware version 59, 68 FTP. see also File Transfer Program 171 G General wireless LAN screen 110 Guest WLAN 108 Guest WLAN Bandwidth 109 Guide Quick Start 2 H HTTP 171 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol 171 I IGMP 97 see also Internet Group Multicast Protocol version IGMP version 97 Internet Group Multicast Protocol 97 IP Address 131, 132, 142 IP alias 130 IP Pool 134 J Java 162 L LAN 129 IP pool setup 130 LAN overview 129 LAN setup 129 LAN TCP/IP 130 Language 199 Link type 60, 69 local (user) database 107 and encryption 108 Local Area Network 129 M MAC 121 MAC address 96, 107 cloning 96 MAC address filter 107 MAC address filtering 121 MAC filter 121 managing the device good habits 16 using the web configurator. See web configurator. using the WPS. See WPS. MBSSID 15 260 NBG5615 Users Guide Index Media access control 121 media client 183 media file 183, 186 type 186 media server 183 overview 183 meida file play 183 Memory usage 60, 68 mode 15 Multicast 97 IGMP 97 N NAT 139, 142 global 140 how it works 141 inside 140 local 140 outside 140 overview 139 port forwarding 146 see also Network Address Translation server 140 server sets 146 NAT Traversal 177 Navigation Panel 60, 69 navigation panel 60, 69 Network Address Translation 139, 142 O operating mode 15 other documentation 2 P P2P 171 peer-to-peer 171 Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 99 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 101 Pool Size 134 Port forwarding 142, 146 default server 142, 146 example 146 local server 142 port numbers services port speed 60, 69 PPPoE 99 dial-up connection PPTP 101 product registration 254 Q Quality of Service (QoS) 123 Quick Start Guide 2 R RADIUS server 107 registration product 254 related documentation 2 Remote management and NAT 174 limitations 173 system timeout 174 Reset button 16 Reset the device 16 Restore configuration 198 Roaming 123 Router Mode status screen 57 RTS/CTS Threshold 106, 123 S Samba 185 Scheduling 126 Server Message Block, see SMB Service and port numbers 159, 170 NBG5615 Users Guide 261 Index Service Set 53, 110, 120 Service Set IDentification 53, 110, 120 Service Set IDentity. See SSID. Session Initiated Protocol 171 SIP 171 SMB 185 SSID 53, 59, 68, 106, 110, 120 stateful inspection firewall 155 Static DHCP 134 Static Route 151 Status 57 Subnet Mask 131, 132 Summary DHCP table 90 Packet statistics 91 Wireless station status 92 System General Setup 193 System restart 199 T TCP/IP configuration 133 Time setting 195 trademarks 253 trigger port 147 Trigger port forwarding 147 example 147 process 147 U Universal Plug and Play 177 Application 177 Security issues 177 UPnP 177 URL Keyword Blocking 162 USB media sharing 183 user authentication 107 local (user) database 107 RADIUS server 107 User Name 150 V VoIP 171 VPN 101 W Wake On LAN 175 WAN (Wide Area Network) 95 WAN MAC address 96 warranty 254 note 254 Web Configurator how to access 39 Overview 39 web configurator 16 Web Proxy 162 WEP Encryption 114, 116 WEP encryption 113 WEP key 113 windows media player 183 Wireless association list 92 wireless channel 207 wireless LAN 207 wireless LAN scheduling 126 Wireless network basic guidelines 106 channel 106 encryption 107 example 105 MAC address filter 107 overview 105 security 106 SSID 106 Wireless security 106 overview 106 type 106 wireless security 207 Wireless tutorial 73 Wizard setup 27 WLAN button 17 WoL 175 work group 185 name 185 262 NBG5615 Users Guide Index Windows 185 World Wide Web 171 WPA compatible 108 WPS 16 WWW 171 X Xbox Live 171 NBG5615 Users Guide 263 Index 264 NBG5615 Users Guide

C HAPTER 14 DHCP Server 14.1 Overview DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NBG5615s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NBG5615 provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. 14.1.1 What You Can Do

Use the General screen to enable the DHCP server (Section 14.2 on page 133).

Use the Advanced screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses (Section 14.3 on page 134).

Use the Client List screen to view the current DHCP client information (Section 14.4 on page 136). 14.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. MAC Addresses Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen. 14.2 DHCP Server General Screen Use this screen to enable the DHCP server. Click N et w ork > DHCP Server. The following screen displays. NBG5615 Users Guide 133 Chapter 14 DHCP Server Figure 78 Network > DHCP Server > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 52 Network > DHCP Server > General LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Server Select Enable to activate DHCP for LAN. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients (computers) to obtain TCP/IP configuration at startup from a server. Enable the DHCP server unless your ISP instructs you to do otherwise. Select Disable to stop the NBG5615 acting as a DHCP server. When configured as a server, the NBG5615 provides TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If not, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computers must be manually configured. When set as a server, fill in the following four fields. This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool for LAN. This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool for LAN. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. IP Pool Starting Address Pool Size Apply Cancel 14.3 DHCP Server Advanced Screen This screen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses. You can also use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the NBG5615 sends to the DHCP clients. To change your NBG5615s static DHCP settings, click N et w ork > DHCP Server > Advanced. The following screen displays. 134 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 79 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced Chapter 14 DHCP Server The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 53 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Static DHCP Table

This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row). MAC Address Type the MAC address (with colons) of a computer on your LAN. IP Address DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN. The NBG5615 passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address (in the order you specify here) to the DHCP clients. The NBG5615 only passes this information to the LAN DHCP clients when you enable DHCP Server. When you disable DH CP Server, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured. NBG5615 Users Guide 135 Chapter 14 DHCP Server Table 53 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server Select Obt ained From I SP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information

(and the NBG5615's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. Select User- Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User- Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User- Defined changes to N one after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User- Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-

Defined changes to N one after you click Apply. Select DN S Relay to have the NBG5615 act as a DNS proxy. The NBG5615's LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (read-only). The NBG5615 tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the NBG5615 itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the NBG5615, the NBG5615 forwards the query to the NBG5615's system DNS server (configured in the W AN > I nt ernet Connection screen) and relays the response back to the computer. You can only select DN S Relay for one of the three servers; if you select DN S Relay for a second or third DNS server, that choice changes to N one after you click Apply. Select N one if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 14.4 DHCP Client List Screen The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name and MAC Address) of network clients using the NBG5615s DHCP servers. Configure this screen to always assign an IP address to a MAC address (and host name). Click N et w ork > DHCP Server > Client List . Note: You can also view a read-only client list by clicking Monit or > DHCP Server. Figure 80 Network > DHCP Server > Client List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 54 Network > DHCP Server > Client List LABEL DESCRIPTION

Status This is the index number of the host computer. This field displays whether the connection to the host computer is up (a yellow bulb) or down (a gray bulb). 136 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 14 DHCP Server Table 54 Network > DHCP Server > Client List (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name IP Address This field displays the computer host name. This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. MAC Address This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host N am e field. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address which uniquely identifies a device. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Select this if you want to reserve the IP address for this specific MAC address. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen. Reserve Apply Cancel NBG5615 Users Guide 137 Chapter 14 DHCP Server 138 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 15 NAT 15.1 Overview NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network. The figure below is a simple illustration of a NAT network. You want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses to the devices (A to D) connected to your NBG5615. The ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. All traffic coming from A to D going out to the Internet use the IP address of the NBG5615, which is 192.168.1.1. Figure 81 NAT Example A: 192.168.1.33 FTP, Telnet, SNMP Ports 21 to 25 B: 192.168.1.34 Port 80 C: 192.168.1.35 LAN WAN 192.168.1.1 IP address assigned by ISP This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the NBG5615. Note: You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the NBG5615. 15.1.1 What You Can Do

Use the General screen to enable NAT (Section 15.2 on page 141). NBG5615 Users Guide 139 Chapter 15 NAT

Use the Port Forw arding screen to set a default server and change your NBG5615s port forwarding settings to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network

(Section 15.3 on page 142).

Use the Port Trigger screen to change your NBG5615s trigger port settings (Section 15.5.3 on page 147). 15.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Inside/Outside This denotes where a host is located relative to the NBG5615, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/Local This denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. Note: Inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. An inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 55 NAT Definitions ITEM Inside DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. Outside This refers to the host on the WAN. Local Global This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. Note: NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber

(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local 140 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 15 NAT network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers , NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your NBG5615 filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The I P Net work Address Translator ( NAT). How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The NBG5615 keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 82 How NAT Works 15.2 General Use this screen to enable NAT and set a default server. Click N et w ork > N AT to open the General screen. Figure 83 Network > NAT > General NBG5615 Users Guide 141 Chapter 15 NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Network > NAT > General LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Address Translation (NAT) Network Address Translation (NAT) allows the translation of an Internet protocol address used within one network (for example a private IP address used in a local network) to a different IP address known within another network (for example a public IP address used on the Internet). Select Enable to activate NAT. Select Disable to turn it off. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 15.3 Port Forwarding Screen Use this screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network and set a default server. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server. If the default is not defined, the service request is simply discarded. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming services will be forwarded. To change your NBG5615s port forwarding settings, click Net w ork > N AT > Port Forw arding. The screen appears as shown. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server, the NBG5615 discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management. Refer to Appendix C on page 249 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. 142 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 84 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding Chapter 15 NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 57 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Server Setup Default Server In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forw arding screen. You can decide whether you want to use the default server or specify a server manually. Select this to use the default server. Change to Server Select this and manually enter the servers IP address. Service Name Select a pre-defined service from the drop-down list box. The pre-defined service port number(s) and protocol will be displayed in the port forwarding summary table. Otherwise, select User define to manually enter the port number(s) and select the IP protocol. Service Protocol Select the transport layer protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP_ UDP. If you have chosen a pre-defined service in the Service N am e field, the protocol will be configured automatically. Server IP Address Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here and click Add to add it in the port forwarding summary table.

Status Name Protocol Port This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry. This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled. This field displays a name to identify this rule. This is the transport layer protocol used for the service. This field displays the port number(s). Server IP Address This field displays the inside IP address of the server. Modify Click the Edit icon to open the edit screen where you can modify an existing rule. Click the Delet e icon to remove a rule. NBG5615 Users Guide 143 Chapter 15 NAT Table 57 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 15.3.1 Port Forwarding Edit Screen This screen lets you edit a port forwarding rule. Click a rules Edit icon in the Port Forw arding screen to open the following screen. Figure 85 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Forwarding Select Enable to turn on this rule and the requested service can be forwarded to the host with a specified internal IP address. Service Name Select Disable to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry. Type a name (of up to 31 printable characters) to identify this rule in the first field next to Service N am e. Otherwise, select a predefined service in the second field next to Service N am e. The predefined service name and port number(s) will display in the Service N am e and Port fields. Protocol Select the transport layer protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP_ UDP. If you have chosen a pre-defined service in the Service N am e field, the protocol will be configured automatically. Port Type a port number(s) to define the service to be forwarded to the specified server. To specify a range of ports, enter a hyphen (-) between the first port and the last port, such as 10-. Server IP Address Type the IP address of the server on your LAN that receives packets from the port(s) specified in the Port field. Back Apply Cancel Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 144 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 15 NAT 15.4 Port Trigger Screen To change your NBG5615s trigger port settings, click N et w ork > N AT > Port Trigger. The screen appears as shown. Note: Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port (range) at a time. Figure 86 Network > NAT > Port Trigger The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 59 Network > NAT > Port Trigger LABEL DESCRIPTION

Name Incoming This is the rule index number (read-only). Type a unique name (up to 15 characters) for identification purposes. All characters are permitted - including spaces. Incoming is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The NBG5615 forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Trigger The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the NBG5615 to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. NBG5615 Users Guide 145 Chapter 15 NAT 15.5 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG5615 features described in this chapter. 15.5.1 NATPort Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make accessible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single machine to the outside world. Use the Port Forw arding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server. If the default is not defined, the service request is simply discarded. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. 15.5.2 NAT Port Forwarding Example Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 87 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example 146 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 15 NAT 15.5.3 Trigger Port Forwarding Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service

(coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address. Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The NBG5615 records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the NBG5615's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("incoming"

port), the NBG5615 forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computers connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application. 15.5.4 Trigger Port Forwarding Example The following is an example of trigger port forwarding. Figure 88 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example Janes com put er Real Audio Server Port 7 0 7 0 1 2 3 4 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070). Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the NBG5615 to record Janes computer IP address. The NBG5615 associates Jane's computer IP address with the "incoming" port range of 6970-7170. The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170. The NBG5615 forwards the traffic to Janes computer IP address. 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The NBG5615 times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol), or two hours with TCP/IP

(Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). NBG5615 Users Guide 147 Chapter 15 NAT 15.5.5 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports 1 2 Trigger events only happen on data that is coming from inside the NBG5615 and going to the outside. If an application needs a continuous data stream, that port (range) will be tied up so that another computer on the LAN cant trigger it. 148 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 16 DDNS 16.1 Overview DDNS services let you use a domain name with a dynamic IP address. 16.1.1 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. What is DDNS?

Dynamic Domain Name Service (DDNS) services let you use a fixed domain name with a dynamic IP address. Users can always use the same domain name instead of a different dynamic IP address that changes each time to connect to the NBG5615 or a server in your network. Note: The NBG5615 must have a public global IP address and you should have your registered DDNS account information on hand. 16.2 General To change your NBG5615s DDNS, click N et w ork > DDNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 89 Dynamic DNS NBG5615 Users Guide 149 Chapter 16 DDNS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 60 Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Select Enable to use dynamic DNS. Select Disable to turn this feature off. Service Provider Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider. Host Name Usename Password Apply Cancel Enter a host names in the field provided. You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (","). Enter your user name. Enter the password assigned to you. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 150 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 17 Static Route 17.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your NBG5615. The NBG5615 usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the NBG5615 send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the NBG5615s LAN interface. The NBG5615 routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the NBG5615s default gateway (R1 ). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2 . You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 90 Example of Static Routing Topology A R3 LAN WAN R1 R2 17.2 IP Static Route Screen Click N et w ork > St at ic Rout e to open the St at ic Rout e screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 151 Chapter 17 Static Route Figure 91 Network > Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 61 Network > Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Static Route Click this to create a new rule.

Status Name Destination Gateway This is the number of an individual static route. This field indicates whether the rule is active (yellow bulb) or not (gray bulb). This field displays a name to identify this rule. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Subent Mask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination. Modify Click the Edit icon to open a screen where you can modify an existing rule. Apply Cancel Click the Delete icon to remove a rule from the NBG5615. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 17.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route Click the Add St at ic Rout e button or a rules Edit icon in the St at ic Rout e screen. Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route. Figure 92 Network > Static Route: Add/Edit 152 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 17 Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 62 Network > Static Route: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Static Route Route Name Destination IP Address Select to enable or disable this rule. Type a name to identify this rule. You can use up to printable English keyboard characters, including spaces. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here. Gateway IP Address Enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your NBG5615's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Back Apply Cancel Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. NBG5615 Users Guide 153 Chapter 17 Static Route 154 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 18 Firewall 18.1 Overview Use these screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your NBG5615 and your LAN from unwanted or malicious traffic. Enable the firewall to protect your LAN computers from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access between the LAN and WAN. By default the firewall:

allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all of the networks.

blocks traffic that originates on the other networks from going to the LAN. The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4). Figure 93 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN A 1 2 3 4 18.1.1 What You Can Do

Use the General screen to enable or disable the NBG5615s firewall (Section 18.2 on page 157).

Use the Services screen enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you want to block and the date/time you want to block them (Section 18.3 on page 157). 18.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. NBG5615 Users Guide 155 Chapter 18 Firewall What is a Firewall?

Originally, the term firewall referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of fire from one room to another. The networking term "firewall" is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control policy between two networks. It may also be defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from a network that is not trusted. Of course, firewalls cannot solve every security problem. A firewall is one of the mechanisms used to establish a network security perimeter in support of a network security policy. It should never be the only mechanism or method employed. For a firewall to guard effectively, you must design and deploy it appropriately. This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information-security policy. In addition, specific policies must be implemented within the firewall itself. Stateful Inspection Firewall Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules. They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol. They also "inspect" the session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols. These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency; however, they may lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support. Firewalls, of one type or another, have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises. About the NBG5615 Firewall The NBG5615s firewall feature physically separates the LAN and the WAN and acts as a secure gateway for all data passing between the networks. It is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated (click the General tab under Firew all and then click the Enable Firew all check box). The NBG5615's purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network (LAN) to be securely connected to the Internet. The NBG5615 can be used to prevent theft, destruction and modification of data, as well as log events, which may be important to the security of your network. The NBG5615 is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet. This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN. The NBG5615 has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports, which are used to physically separate the network into two areas.The WAN (Wide Area Network) port attaches to the broadband

(cable or DSL) modem to the Internet. The LAN (Local Area Network) port attaches to a network of computers, which needs security from the outside world. These computers will have access to Internet services such as e-mail, FTP and the World Wide Web. However, "inbound access" is not allowed (by default) unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service. Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall Change the default password via Web Configurator. Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way, including attaching a modem to the port. Limit who can access your router. NBG5615 Users Guide 1 2 3 156 Chapter 18 Firewall 4 Don't enable any local service (such as NTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network. 5 6 7 For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces. Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active. Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room. 18.2 General Screen Use this screen to enable or disable the NBG5615s firewall, and set up firewall logs. Click Securit y

> Firew all to open the General screen. Figure 94 Security > Firewall > General l The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 63 Security > Firewall > General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Firewall Select this check box to activate the firewall. The NBG5615 performs access control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is activated. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save the settings. Click Cancel to start configuring this screen again. 18.3 Services Screen If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your NBG5615, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the NBG5615 exists. Use this screen to prevent the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your NBG5615 when unsupported ports are probed. You can also use this screen to enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you want to block and the date/time you want to block them. Click Securit y > Firew all > Services. The screen appears as shown next. NBG5615 Users Guide 157 Chapter 18 Firewall Figure 95 Security > Firewall > Services l The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 64 Security > Firewall > Services LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL ICMP DESCRIPTION Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error-reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user. Respond to Ping on The NBG5615 will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select W AN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests. Otherwise select LAN & W AN to reply to all incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests. Apply Click Apply to save the settings. Enable Firewall Rule Enable Firewall Rule Select this check box to activate the firewall rules that you define (see Add Firew all Rule below). Apply Click Apply to save the settings. Add Firewall Rule Service Name Enter a name that identifies or describes the firewall rule. MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the computer for which the firewall rule applies. Dest IP Address Enter the IP address of the computer to which traffic for the application or service is entering. The NBG5615 applies the firewall rule to traffic initiating from this computer. 158 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 18 Firewall Table 64 Security > Firewall > Services (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Source IP Address Enter the IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the application or service. The NBG5615 applies the firewall rule to traffic initiating from this computer. Protocol Select the protocol (TCP, UDP or I CMP) used to transport the packets for which you want to apply the firewall rule. Dest Port Range Enter the port number/range of the destination that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Source Port Range Add Rule Firewall Rule

Enter the port number/range of the source that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Click Add to save the firewall rule. This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn. Service Name This is a name that identifies or describes the firewall rule. MAC address This is the MAC address of the computer for which the firewall rule applies. Dest IP Source IP Protocol This is the IP address of the computer to which traffic for the application or service is entering. This is the IP address of the computer from which traffic for the application or service is initialized. This is the protocol (TCP, UDP or I CMP) used to transport the packets for which you want to apply the firewall rule. Dest Port Range This is the port number/range of the destination that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Source Port Range This is the port number/range of the source that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Action Delete Cancel DROP - Traffic matching the conditions of the firewall rule are stopped. Click Delet e to remove the firewall rule. Click Cancel to start configuring this screen again. See Appendix C on page 249 for commonly used services and port numbers. NBG5615 Users Guide 159 Chapter 18 Firewall 160 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 19 Content Filtering 19.1 Overview This chapter provides a brief overview of content filtering using the embedded web GUI. Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to your needs. Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features or specific URL keywords. 19.1.1 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Content Filtering Profiles Content filtering allows you to block certain web features, such as cookies, and/or block access to specific web sites. For example, you can configure one policy that blocks John Does access to arts and entertainment web pages. A content filtering profile conveniently stores your custom settings for the following features. Keyword Blocking URL Checking The NBG5615 checks the URLs domain name (or IP address) and file path separately when performing keyword blocking. The URLs domain name or IP address is the characters that come before the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, the domain name is www.zyxel.com.tw. The file path is the characters that come after the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, the file path is news/pressroom.php. Since the NBG5615 checks the URLs domain name (or IP address) and file path separately, it will not find items that go across the two. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/

pressroom.php, the NBG5615 would find tw in the domain name (www.zyxel.com.tw). It would also find news in the file path (news/pressroom.php) but it would not find tw/news. 19.2 Content Filter Use this screen to restrict web features, add keywords for blocking and designate a trusted computer. Click Securit y > Cont ent Filt er to open the Cont ent Filt er screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 161 Chapter 19 Content Filtering Figure 96 Security > Content Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 65 Security > Content Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Trusted IP Setup To enable this feature, type an IP address of any one of the computers in your network that you want to have as a trusted computer. This allows the trusted computer to have full access to all features that are configured to be blocked by content filtering. Restrict Web Features ActiveX Java Cookies Web Proxy Leave this field blank to have no trusted computers. Select the box(es) to restrict a feature. When you download a page containing a restricted feature, that part of the web page will appear blank or grayed out. A tool for building dynamic and active Web pages and distributed object applications. When you visit an ActiveX Web site, ActiveX controls are downloaded to your browser, where they remain in case you visit the site again. A programming language and development environment for building downloadable Web components or Internet and intranet business applications of all kinds. Used by Web servers to track usage and provide service based on ID. A server that acts as an intermediary between a user and the Internet to provide security, administrative control, and caching service. When a proxy server is located on the WAN it is possible for LAN users to circumvent content filtering by pointing to this proxy server. Enable URL Keyword Blocking The NBG5615 can block Web sites with URLs that contain certain keywords in the domain name or IP address. For example, if the keyword "bad" was enabled, all sites containing this keyword in the domain name or IP address will be blocked, e.g., URL http://

www.website.com/bad.html would be blocked. Select this check box to enable this feature. Keyword Type a keyword in this field. You may use any character (up to 64 characters). Wildcards are not allowed. You can also enter a numerical IP address. Add Click Add after you have typed a keyword. Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed. When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request. 162 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 19 Content Filtering Table 65 Security > Content Filter (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Keyword List This list displays the keywords already added. Delete Clear All Apply Cancel Highlight a keyword in the lower box and click Delet e to remove it. The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply. Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 19.3 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG5615 features described in this chapter. 19.3.1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking You can use commands to set how much of a websites URL the content filter is to check for keyword blocking. See the appendices for information on how to access and use the command interpreter. Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking By default, the NBG5615 checks the URLs domain name or IP address when performing keyword blocking. This means that the NBG5615 checks the characters that come before the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, content filtering only searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw. Full Path URL Checking Full path URL checking has the NBG5615 check the characters that come before the last slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, full path URL checking searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw/news/. Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 6 [disable | enable] command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's full path. File Name URL Checking Filename URL checking has the NBG5615 check all of the characters in the URL. For example, filename URL checking searches for keywords within the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/

news/pressroom.php. NBG5615 Users Guide 163 Chapter 19 Content Filtering Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 8 [disable | enable] command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's complete filename. 164 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 20 Bandwidth Management 20.1 Overview This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management and editing rules. ZyXELs Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application. In the figure below, uplink traffic goes from the LAN device (A) to the WAN device (B). Bandwidth management is applied before sending the packets out to the WAN. Downlink traffic comes back from the WAN device (B) to the LAN device (A). Bandwidth management is applied before sending the traffic out to LAN. Figure 97 Bandwidth Management Example

-> VOIP

-> FTP

-> HTTP

-> Chat, Email A B You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity (bandwidth budgets) to individual applications (like VoIP, Web, FTP, and E-mail for example). 20.2 What You Can Do

Use the General screen to enable bandwidth management and assign bandwidth values (Section 20.4 on page 166).

Use the Advanced screen to configure bandwidth managements rule for the pre-defined services and applications (Section 20.5 on page 166). NBG5615 Users Guide 165 Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management 20.3 What You Need To Know The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface (LAN to WAN, WLAN to WAN) must be less than or equal to the Upst ream Bandw idt h that you configure in the Bandw idt h Managem ent Advanced screen (Section 20.5 on page 166). The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN interface (WAN to LAN, WAN to WLAN) must be less than or equal to the Dow nst ream Bandw idt h that you configure in the Bandw idt h Managem ent Advanced screen Section 20.5 on page 166. 20.4 General Screen Use this screen to have the NBG5615 apply bandwidth management. Click Managem ent > Bandw idt h MGMT to open the bandwidth management General screen. Figure 98 Management > Bandwidth Management > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 66 Management > Bandwidth Management > General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Bandwidth Management This field allows you to have NBG5615 apply bandwidth management. Enable bandwidth management to give traffic that matches a bandwidth rule priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth rule. Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to control the maximum or minimum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches a bandwidth rule. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 20.5 Advanced Screen Use this screen to configure bandwidth management rules for the pre-defined services or applications. You can also use this screen to configure bandwidth management rule for other services or applications that are not on the pre-defined list of NBG5615. Additionally, you can define the source and destination IP addresses and port for a service or application. 166 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management Note: The two tables shown in this screen can be configured and applied at the same time. Click Managem ent > Bandw idt h MGMT > Advanced to open the bandwidth management Advanced screen. Figure 99 Management > Bandwidth Management > Advanced NBG5615 Users Guide 167 Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 67 Management > Bandwidth Management > Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Management Bandwidth Upstream Bandwidth Select the total amount of bandwidth from a drop-down list box that you want to dedicate to uplink traffic. Otherwise, select User Defined and manually specify the amount of bandwidth in kilobits per second. This is traffic from LAN/WLAN to WAN. Downstream Bandwidth Select the total amount of bandwidth from a drop-down list box that you want to dedicate to uplink traffic. Otherwise, select User Defined and manually specify the amount of bandwidth in kilobits per second. This is traffic from WAN to LAN/WLAN. Application List Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth based on a pre-defined service.

Priority This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule. Select a priority from the drop down list box. Choose High, Mid or Low .

High - Select this for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay).

Mid - Select this for "excellent effort" or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. Low - Select this for non-critical "background" traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.

Category Service This is the category where a service belongs. This is the name of the service. Select the check box to have the NBG5615 apply this bandwidth management rule. Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configurat ion screen where you can modify the rule. User-defined Service Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific applications or services you specify.

Enable Direction This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule. Select this check box to have the NBG5615 apply this bandwidth management rule. Select To LAN & W LAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic from WAN to LAN and WLAN. Select To W AN to apply bandwidth management to traffic from LAN/WLAN to WAN. Service Name Enter a descriptive name for the bandwidth management rule. Category Modify Apply Cancel This is the category where a service belongs. Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configurat ion screen. Modify an existing rule or create a new rule in the Rule Configuration screen. See Section 20.5.2 on page 169 for more information. Click the Rem ove icon to delete a rule. Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 20.5.1 Rule Configuration: Application Rule Configuration If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for a pre-defined service or application, click the Edit icon in the Applicat ion List table of the Advanced screen. The following screen displays. 168 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 100 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: Application List Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 68 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: Application List LABEL

Enable Direction Bandwidth Destination Port Source Port Protocol Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule. Select an interfaces check box to enable bandwidth management on that interface. These read-only labels represent the physical interfaces. Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router through the interface, regardless of the traffics source. Traffic redirect or IP alias may cause LAN-to-LAN traffic to pass through the NBG5615 and be managed by bandwidth management. Select Maxim um Bandw idt h or M inim um Bandw idt h and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second. This is the port number of the destination that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. See Appendix C on page 249 for some common services and port numbers. This is the port number of the source that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. See Appendix C on page 249 for some common services and port numbers. This is the protocol (TCP, UDP or user- defined) used for the service. Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 20.5.2 Rule Configuration: User Defined Service Rule Configuration If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for other applications or services, click the Edit icon in the User- defined Service table of the Advanced screen. The following screen displays. NBG5615 Users Guide 169 Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management Figure 101 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: User-defined Service The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 69 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: User-defined Service LABEL DESCRIPTION BW Budget Destination Address Start Select Maxim um Bandw idt h or Minim um Bandw idt h and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second. Enter the starting IP address of the destination computer. The NBG5615 applies bandwidth management to the service or application that is entering this computer. Destination Address End Enter the ending IP address of the destination computer. The NBG5615 applies bandwidth management to the service or application that is entering this computer. Destination Port This is the port number of the destination that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Source Address Start Enter the starting IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the application or service. The NBG5615 applies bandwidth management to traffic initiating from this computer. Source Address End Enter the ending IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the application or service. Source Port Protocol The NBG5615 applies bandwidth management to traffic initiating from this computer. This is the port number of the source that define the traffic type, for example TCP port 80 defines web traffic. Select the protocol (TCP, UDP, BOTH) for which the bandwidth management rule applies. If you select BOTH, enter the protocol for which the bandwidth management rule applies. For example, ICMP for ping traffic. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. See Appendix C on page 249 for commonly used services and port numbers. 170 NBG5615 Users Guide 20.5.3 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management The following is a description of some services that you can select and to which you can apply media bandwidth management in the Managem ent > Bandw idt h MGMT > Advanced screen. Table 70 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION FTP WWW E-Mail VoIP (SIP) BitTorrent Gaming File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. The World Wide Web (WWW) is an Internet system to distribute graphical, hyper-linked information, based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) - a client/server protocol for the World Wide Web. The Web is not synonymous with the Internet; rather, it is just one service on the Internet. Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups. The Web is accessed through use of a browser. Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals. Here are some default ports for e-mail:

Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP. Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) is an internationally recognized standard for implementing VoIP. SIP is an application-layer control (signaling) protocol that handles the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet. SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP. BitTorrent is a free P2P (peer-to-peer) sharing tool allowing you to distribute large software and media files. BitTorrent requires you to search for a file with a searching engine yourself. It distributes files by corporation and trading, that is, the client downloads the file in small pieces and share the pieces with other peers to get other half of the file. Online gaming services lets you play multiplayer games on the Internet via broadband technology. As of this writing, your NBG5615 supports Xbox, Playstation, Battlenet and MSN Game Zone. NBG5615 Users Guide 171 Chapter 20 Bandwidth Management 172 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 21 Remote Management 21.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens. Remote Management allows you to manage your NBG5615 from a remote location through the following interfaces:

LAN and WAN

LAN only

WAN only Note: The NBG5615 is managed using the Web Configurator. 21.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter

Use the W W W screen to define the interface/s from which the NBG5615 can be managed remotely using the web and specify a secure client that can manage the NBG5615 (Section 21.4 on page 174).

Use the Telnet screen to define the interface/s from which the NBG5615 can be managed remotely using Telnet service and specify a secure client that can manage the NBG5615 (Section 21.5 on page 175).

Use the W ake On LAN screen to enable Wake on LAN and remotely turn on a device on the local network (Section 21.6 on page 175). 21.3 What You Need to Know Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when:

1 2 3 The IP address in the Secured Client I P Address field (Section 21.4 on page 174) does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the NBG5615 will disconnect the session immediately. There is already another remote management session. You may only have one remote management session running at one time. There is a firewall rule that blocks it. NBG5615 Users Guide 173 Chapter 21 Remote Management 21.3.1 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled:

Use the NBG5615s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN.

Use the NBG5615s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN. 21.3.2 System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The NBG5615 automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. You can change the timeout period in the Maint enance > General screen 21.4 WWW Screen To change your NBG5615s remote management settings, click Managem ent > Rem ot e MGMT >

W W W. Figure 102 Management > Remote Management > WWW The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 71 Management > Remote Management > WWW LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Access Status Secured Client IP Address You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NBG5615 using this service. Select All to allow all computes to access the NBG5615. Otherwise, check Select ed and specify the IP address of the computer that can access the NBG5615. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 174 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 21 Remote Management 21.5 Telnet Screen To change your NBG5615s remote management settings, click Managem ent > Rem ot e MGMT >

Telnet to open the Telnet screen. Figure 103 Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 72 Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Access Status Secured Client IP Address You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NBG5615 using this service. Select All to allow all computes to access the NBG5615. Otherwise, check Select ed and specify the IP address of the computer that can access the NBG5615. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your customized settings. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 21.6 Wake On LAN Screen Wake On LAN (WoL) allows you to remotely turn on a device on the network, such as a computer, storage device or media server. To use this feature the remote hardware (for example the network adapter on a computer) must support Wake On LAN using the Magic Packet method. You need to know the MAC address of the remote device. It may be on a label on the device. NBG5615 Users Guide 175 Chapter 21 Remote Management Use this screen to remotely turn on a device on the network. Click the Managem ent > Rem ot e MGMT > W ake On LAN to open the following screen. Figure 104 Management > Remote MGMT > Wake On LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 73 Management > Remote MGMT > Wake On LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Wake On LAN over WAN Settings Enable WOL over WAN Port Wake On LAN Select this option to have the NBG5615 forward a WoL Magic Packet to all devices on the LAN if the packet comes from the WAN or remote network and uses the port number specified in the Port field. A LAN device whose hardware supports Wake on LAN then will be powered on if it is turned off previously. Type a port number from which a WoL packet is forwarded to the LAN. Wake MAC Address Enter the MAC Address of the device on the network that will be turned on. Start Apply Cancel A MAC address consists of six hexadecimal character pairs. Click this to have the NBG5615 generate a WoL packet and forward it to turn the specified device on. A screen pops up displaying MAC address error if you input the MAC address incorrectly. Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 176 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 22 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 22.1 Overview This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the web configurator. Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. 22.2 What You Need to Know UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. 22.2.1 NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

Dynamic port mapping

Learning public IP addresses

Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT. 22.2.2 Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the NBG5615 allows multicast messages on the LAN only. NBG5615 Users Guide 177 Chapter 22 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. 22.3 UPnP Screen Use this screen to enable UPnP on your NBG5615. Click Managem ent > UPnP to display the screen shown next. Figure 105 Management > UPnP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 74 Management > UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION UPnP Apply Cancel Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the NBG5615's IP address

(although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings. 22.4 Technical Reference The sections show examples of using UPnP. 22.4.1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the NBG5615. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the NBG5615. Turn on your computer and the NBG5615. 22.4.1.1 Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device 1 2 178 Click st art and Cont rol Panel. Double-click Net w ork Connect ions. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. Right-click the icon and select Propert ies. NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 106 Network Connections Chapter 22 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 3 In the I nt ernet Connect ion Propert ies window, click Set t ings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Figure 107 Internet Connection Properties 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Figure 108 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings NBG5615 Users Guide 179 Chapter 22 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Figure 109 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add Note: When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 5 Select Show icon in not ificat ion area w hen connect ed option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. Figure 110 System Tray Icon 6 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Figure 111 Internet Connection Status 22.4.2 Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the NBG5615 without finding out the IP address of the NBG5615 first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the NBG5615. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator. 1 Click St art and then Cont rol Panel. 2 Double-click N et w ork Connect ions. 180 NBG5615 Users Guide 3 Select My N et w ork Places under Ot her Places. Figure 112 Network Connections Chapter 22 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 4 5 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local N et w ork. Right-click on the icon for your NBG5615 and select I nvoke. The web configurator login screen displays. Figure 113 Network Connections: My Network Places 6 Right-click on the icon for your NBG5615 and select Propert ies. A properties window displays with basic information about the NBG5615. NBG5615 Users Guide 181 Chapter 22 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) Figure 114 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example 182 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 23 USB Media Sharing 23.1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure the media sharing settings on the NBG5615. Note: The read and write performance may be affected by amount of file-sharing traffic on your network, type of connected USB device and your USB version (1.1 or 2.0). Media Server You can set up your NBG5615 to act as a media server to provide media (like video) to DLNA-

compliant players, such as Windows Media Player, ZyXEL DMAs (Digital Media Adapters), Xboxes or PS3s. The media server and clients must have IP addresses in the same subnet. The NBG5615 media server enables you to:

Publish all folders for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the NBG5615.

Use hardware-based media clients like the DMA-2500 to play the files. Note: Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published folders. No user name and password nor other form of security is required. The following figure is an overview of the NBG5615s media server feature. DLNA devices A and B can access and play files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the NBG5615 (D). Figure 115 Media Server Overview A B C D NBG5615 Users Guide 183 Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing File-Sharing Server You can also share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your NBG5615 with users on your network. The following figure is an overview of the NBG5615s file-sharing server feature. Computers A and B can access files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the NBG5615 (D). Figure 116 File Sharing Overview B A C D 23.2 What You Can Do

Use the DLN A screen to use the NBG5615 as a media server and allow DLNA-compliant devices to play media files stored in the attached USB device (Section 23.5 on page 186).

Use the SAMBA screen to enable file-sharing via the NBG5615 using Windows Explorer or the workgroup name. This screen also allow you to configure the workgroup name and create user accounts (Section 23.6 on page 186).

Use the FTP screen to allow file sharing via the NBG5615 using FTP and create user accounts

(Section 23.7 on page 188). 23.3 What You Need To Know DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a group of personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home network. DLNA clients play files stored on DLNA servers. The NBG5615 can function as a DLNA-compliant media server and stream files to DLNA-compliant media clients without any configuration. 184 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing Workgroup name This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files. Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network. File Systems A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device. Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems. The file-sharing feature on your NBG5615 supports New Technology File System (NTFS), File Allocation Table (FAT) and FAT32 file systems. Windows/CIFS Common Internet File System (CIFS) is a standard protocol supported by most operating systems in order to share files across the network. CIFS runs over TCP/IP but uses the SMB (Server Message Block) protocol found in Microsoft Windows for file and printer access; therefore, CIFS will allow all applications, not just Web browsers, to open and share files across the Internet. The NBG5615 uses Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol for its file sharing functions. CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the NBG5615. CIFS protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows, Linux Samba and other operating systems (refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility). Samba SMB is a client-server protocol used by Microsoft Windows systems for sharing files, printers, and so on. Samba is a free SMB server that runs on most Unix and Unix-like systems. It provides an implementation of an SMB client and server for use with non-Microsoft operating systems. File Transfer Protocol This is a method of transferring data from one computer to another over a network such as the Internet. 23.4 Before You Begin 1 2 Make sure the NBG5615 is connected to your network and turned on. Connect the USB device to one of the NBG5615s USB ports. The NBG5615 detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. NBG5615 Users Guide 185 Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by the NBG5615, see the troubleshooting for suggestions. 23.5 DLNA Screen Use this screen to have the NBG5615 act as a DLNA-compliant media server that lets DLNA-

compliant media clients on your network play video, music, and photos from the NBG5615 (without having to copy them to another computer). Click M anagem ent > USB Media Sharing > DLN A. Figure 117 Management > USB Media Sharing > DLNA The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 75 Management > USB Media Sharing > DLNA LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable DLNA Select this to have the NBG5615 function as a DLNA-compliant media server. USB1/2 Rescan Apply Cancel Select the media type that you want to share on the USB device connected to the NBG5615s USB port. Click this button to have the NBG5615 scan the media files on the connected USB device and do indexing of the file list again so that DLNA clients can find the new files if any. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 23.6 SAMBA Screen Use this screen to set up file-sharing via the NBG5615 using Windows Explorer or the workgroup name. You can also configure the workgroup name and create file-sharing user accounts. Click Managem ent > USB Media Sharing > SAMBA. 186 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 118 Management > USB Media Sharing > SAMBA Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 76 Management > USB Media Sharing > SAMBA LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable SAMBA Name Work Group Select this to enable file sharing through the NBG5615 using Windows Explorer or by browsing to your work group. Specify the name to identify the NBG5615 in a work group. You can add the NBG5615 to an existing or a new workgroup on your network. Enter the name of the workgroup which your NBG5615 automatically joins. You can set the NBG5615s workgroup name to be exactly the same as the workgroup name to which your computer belongs to. Decription USB1/2 Note: The NBG5615 will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your network administrator. Enter the description of the NBG5615 in a work group. Specify the users access rights to the USB storage device which is connected to the NBG5615s USB port. Read & W rite - The user has read and write rights, meaning that the user can create and edit the files on the connected USB device. Read - The user has read rights only and can not create or edit the files on the connected USB device. User Accounts Before you can share files you need a user account. Configure the following fields to set up a file-sharing account.

This is the index number of the user account. NBG5615 Users Guide 187 Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing Table 76 Management > USB Media Sharing > SAMBA (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable User Name Password USB1/2 Apply Cancel This field displays whether a user account is activated or not. Select the check box to enable the account. Clear the check box to disable the account. Enter a user name that will be allowed to access the shared files. You can enter up to 20 characters. Only letters and numbers allowed. Enter the password used to access the shared files. You can enter up to 20 characters. Only letters and numbers are allowed. The password is case sensitive. Select the USB port(s) of the NBG5615. The configured user can access the files on the USB device(s) connected to the selected USB port(s) only. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 23.7 FTP Screen Use this screen to set up file sharing via the NBG5615 using FTP and create user accounts. Click Managem ent > USB Media Sharing > FTP. Figure 119 Management > USB Media Sharing > FTP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 77 Management > USB Media Sharing > FTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable FTP Select this to enable the FTP server on the NBG5615 for file sharing using FTP. Port You may change the server port number for FTP if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for file sharing. User Accounts Before you can share files you need a user account. Configure the following fields to set up a file-sharing account.

This is the index number of the user account. 188 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing Table 77 Management > USB Media Sharing > FTP (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable User Name Password USB1/2 Upstream Bandwidth Downstream Bandwidth Apply Cancel This field displays whether a user account is activated or not. Select the check box to enable the account. Clear the check box to disable the account. Enter a user name that will be allowed to access the shared files. You can enter up to 20 characters. Only letters and numbers allowed. Enter the password used to access the shared files. You can enter up to 20 characters. Only letters and numbers are allowed. The password is case sensitive. Specify the users access rights to the USB storage device which is connected to the NBG5615s USB port. Read & W rite - The user has read and write rights, meaning that the user can create and edit the files on the connected USB device. Read - The user has read rights only and can not create or edit the files on the connected USB device. N one - The user cannot access the files on the USB device(s) connected to the USB port. Enter the maximum bandwidth (in Kbps) allowed for incoming FTP traffic. Enter the maximum bandwidth (in Kbps) allowed for outgoing FTP traffic. Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 23.8 Example of Accessing Your Shared Files From a Computer You can use Windows Explorer or FTP to access the USB storage devices connected to the NBG5615. This example shows you how to use Microsofts Windows XP to browse your shared files. Refer to your operating systems documentation for how to browse your file structure. 23.8.1 Use Windows Explorer to Share Files You should have enabled file sharing and create a user account (Bob/1234 for example) with read and write access to USB 1 in the USB Media Sharing > SAMBA screen. Open Windows Explorer to access the connected USB device using either Windows Explorer browser or by browsing to your workgroup. NBG5615 Users Guide 189 Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing 1 In Windows Explorers Address bar type a double backslash \\ followed by the IP address of the NBG5615 (the default IP address of the NBG5615 in router mode is 192.168.1.1) and press

[ENTER]. A screen asking for password authentication appears. Type the user name and password

(Bob and 1234 in this example) and click OK. Note: Once you log into the shared folder via your NBG5615, you do not have to relogin unless you restart your computer. 190 NBG5615 Users Guide 2 You can also use the workgroup name to access files by browsing to the workgroup folder using the folder tree on the left side of the screen. It is located under My N et w ork Places. In this example the workgroup name is the default Workgroup. Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing 23.8.2 Use FTP to Share Files You can use FTP to access the USB storage devices connected to the NBG5615. In this example, we use the web browser to share files via FTP from the LAN. The way or screen you log into the FTP server (on the NBG5615) varies depending on your FTP client. See your FTP client documentation for more information. You should have enabled file sharing and create a user account (Bob/1234 for example) with read and write access to USB 1 in the USB Media Sharing > FTP screen. 1 In your web browsers address or URL bar type ftp:// followed by the IP address of the NBG5615

(the default LAN IP address of the NBG5615 in router mode is 192.168.1.1) and click Go or press

[ENTER]. NBG5615 Users Guide 191 Chapter 23 USB Media Sharing 2 A screen asking for password authentication appears. Enter the user name and password (you configured in the USB Media Sharing > FTP screen) and click Log On. 3 The screen changes and shows you the folder for the USB storage device connected to your NBG5615. Double-click the folder to display the contents in it. 192 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 24 Maintenance 24.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Maint enance screens. 24.2 What You Can Do

Use the General screen to set the timeout period of the management session (Section 24.3 on page 193).

Use the Passw ord screen to change your NBG5615s system password (Section 24.4 on page 194).

Use the Tim e screen to change your NBG5615s time and date (Section 24.5 on page 195).

Use the Firm w are Upgrade screen to upload firmware to your NBG5615 (Section 24.6 on page 196).

Use the Backup/ Rest ore screen to view information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration (Section 24.8 on page 199).

Use the Rest art screen to reboot the NBG5615 without turning the power off (Section 24.8 on page 199).

Use the Language screen to change the language for the Web Configurator (Section 24.9 on page 199) .

Use the Sys OP Mode screen to select how you want to use your NBG5615 (Section 24.11 on page 201). 24.3 General Screen Use this screen to set the management session timeout period. Click Maint enance > General. The following screen displays. Figure 120 Maintenance > General NBG5615 Users Guide 193 Chapter 24 Maintenance The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 78 Maintenance > General LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG5615 in an Ethernet network. Domain Name Enter the domain name you want to give to the NBG5615. Administrator Inactivity Timer Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the session times out. The default is 5 minutes. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended). Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 24.4 Password Screen It is strongly recommended that you change your NBG5615's password. If you forget your NBG5615's password (or IP address), you will need to reset the device. See Section 24.8 on page 199 for details. Click Maint enance > Passw ord. The screen appears as shown. Figure 121 Maintenance > Password The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 79 Maintenance > Password LABEL DESCRIPTION Password Setup Change your NBG5615s password (recommended) using the fields as shown. Old Password New Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays an asterisk (*) for each character you type. Retype to Confirm Type the new password again in this field. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 194 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 24 Maintenance 24.5 Time Setting Screen Use this screen to configure the NBG5615s time based on your local time zone. To change your NBG5615s time and date, click Maint enance > Tim e. The screen appears as shown. Figure 122 Maintenance > Time The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 80 Maintenance > Time LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time and Date Current Time This field displays the time of your NBG5615. Each time you reload this page, the NBG5615 synchronizes the time with the time server. Current Date This field displays the date of your NBG5615. Each time you reload this page, the NBG5615 synchronizes the date with the time server. Current Time and Date Manual New Time

(hh:mm:ss) Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it. This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually. When you select Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply. NBG5615 Users Guide 195 Chapter 24 Maintenance Table 80 Maintenance > Time (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION New Date

(yyyy/mm/dd) This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually. When you select Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply. Get from Time Server Select this radio button to have the NBG5615 get the time and date from the time server you specified below. User Defined Time Server Address Select User Defined Tim e Server Address and enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Time Zone Setup Time Zone Daylight Savings Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings. The at field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and select 2 in the at field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you select in the at field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings. The at field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First , Sunday, N ovem ber and select 2 in the at field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, Oct ober. The time you select in the at field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5615. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 24.6 Firmware Upgrade Screen Find firmware at www.zyxel.com in a file that uses the version number and project code with a

*.bin extension, e.g., V1.00(AAGI.0).bin. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. 196 NBG5615 Users Guide Click Maint enance > Firm w are Upgrade. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your NBG5615. Figure 123 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade Chapter 24 Maintenance The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 81 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Browse... Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Brow se... to find it. Click Brow se... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. Check for Latest Firmware Now Click this to check for the latest updated firmware. Note: Do not turn off the NBG5615 while firmware upload is in progress!

After you see the Firm w are Upload I n Process screen, wait two minutes before logging into the NBG5615 again. The NBG5615 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 124 Network Temporarily Disconnected After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the St at us screen. If the upload was not successful, an error message appears. Click Ret urn to go back to the Firm w are Upgrade screen. NBG5615 Users Guide 197 Chapter 24 Maintenance 24.7 Configuration Backup/Restore Screen Backup configuration allows you to back up (save) the NBG5615s current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your NBG5615 is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your NBG5615. Click Maint enance > Backup/ Rest ore. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears as shown next. Figure 125 Maintenance > Backup/Restore The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 82 Maintenance > Backup/Restore LABEL DESCRIPTION Backup File Path Browse... Click Back up to save the NBG5615s current configuration to your computer. Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Brow se... to find it. Click Brow se... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. 198 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 24 Maintenance Table 82 Maintenance > Backup/Restore (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. Note: Do not turn off the NBG5615 while configuration file upload is in progress. After you see a configuration upload successful screen, you must then wait one minute before logging into the NBG5615 again. The NBG5615 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. If you see an error screen, click Back to return to the Backup/Restore screen. Reset Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user-entered configuration information and returns the NBG5615 to its factory defaults. You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your NBG5615. Refer to the chapter about introducing the Web Configurator for more information on the RESET button. Note: If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default NBG5615 IP address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix B on page 221 for details on how to set up your computers IP address. 24.8 Restart Screen System restart allows you to reboot the NBG5615 without turning the power off. Click Maint enance > Rest art to open the following screen. Figure 126 Maintenance > Restart Click Rest art to have the NBG5615 reboot. This does not affect the NBG5615's configuration. 24.9 Language Screen Use this screen to change the language for the Web Configurator. Select the language you prefer and click Apply. The Web Configurator language changes after a while without restarting the NBG5615. NBG5615 Users Guide 199 Chapter 24 Maintenance Figure 127 Maintenance > Language 24.10 System Operation Mode Overview The Sys OP Mode (System Operation Mode) function lets you configure your NBG5615 as a router or access point. You can choose between Rout er Mode, and Access Point Mode depending on your network topology and the features you require from your device. The following describes the device modes available in your NBG5615. Router A router connects your local network with another network, such as the Internet. The router has two IP addresses, the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address. Figure 128 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode Access Point An access point enabled all ethernet ports to be bridged together and be in the same subnet. To connect to the Internet, another device, such as a router, is required. 200 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 129 Access Point Mode Chapter 24 Maintenance 24.11 Sys OP Mode Screen Use this screen to select how you want to use your NBG5615. Figure 130 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode The following table describes the labels in the General screen. Table 83 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Mode Router Mode Select Rout er Mode if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet. This mode offers services such as a firewall or bandwidth management. You can configure the IP address settings on your WAN port. Contact your ISP or system administrator for more information on appropriate settings. NBG5615 Users Guide 201 Chapter 24 Maintenance Table 83 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Access Point Mode Select Access Point M ode if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network. In Access Point M ode, all Ethernet ports have the same IP address.

All ports on the rear panel of the device are LAN ports, including the port labeled WAN. There is no WAN port. The DHCP server on your device is disabled.

Router functions (such as NAT, bandwidth management, remote management, firewall and so on) are not available when the NBG5615 is in Access Point Mode. The IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192.168.1.2.

Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your settings. Click Cancel to return your settings to the default (Rout er). Note: If you select the incorrect system operation Mode you may not be able to connect to the Internet. 202 NBG5615 Users Guide C HAPTER 25 Troubleshooting 25.1 Overview This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories.

Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs

NBG5615 Access and Login

Internet Access

Resetting the NBG5615 to Its Factory Defaults

Wireless Connections

USB Device Problems

ZyXEL Share Center Utility Problems 25.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The NBG5615 does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NBG5615. 2 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NBG5615 and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 3 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG5615. 4 If the problem continues, contact the vendor. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.7 on page 18. 2 3 Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide. Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. NBG5615 Users Guide 203 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 4 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor to the NBG5615. 5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor. 25.3 NBG5615 Access and Login I dont know the IP address of my NBG5615. 1 2 3 4 The default IP address of the NBG5615 in Rout er Mode is 1 9 2 .1 6 8 .1 .1 . The default IP address of the NBG5615 in Access Point Mode is 1 9 2 .1 6 8 .1 .2 . If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the NBG5615 in Rout er Mode by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click St art > Run, enter cm d, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gat ew ay might be the IP address of the NBG5615 (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. If your NBG5615 in Access Point Mode is a DHCP client, you can find your IP address from the DHCP server. This information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network. Find this information directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more information. Reset your NBG5615 to change all settings back to their default. This means your current settings are lost. See Section 25.5 on page 207 in the Troubleshoot ing for information on resetting your NBG5615. I forgot the password. 1 2 The default password is 1 2 3 4 . If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 25.5 on page 207. I cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address.

The default IP address of the NBG5615 in Rout er Mode is 1 9 2 .1 6 8 .1 .1 . The default IP address of the NBG5615 in Access Point Mode is 1 9 2 .1 6 8 .1 .2 .

If you changed the IP address (Section 13.4 on page 130), use the new IP address.

If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I dont know the IP address of my NBG5615. 204 NBG5615 Users Guide Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScript and Java enabled. See Appendix A on page 211. 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NBG5615. (If you know that there are routers between your computer and the NBG5615, skip this step.)

If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address. See Section 13.4 on page 130.

If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computers IP address is in the same subnet as the NBG5615. See Section 13.4 on page 130. 5 6 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the NBG5615 with the default IP address. See Section 1.5 on page 16. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggest ions

Try to access the NBG5615 using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the NBG5615, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the NBG5615 does not respond to HTTP.

If your computer is connected to the W AN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a LAN /ETHERN ET port. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the NBG5615. 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default password is 1 2 3 4 . This field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 This can happen when you fail to log out properly from your last session. Try logging in again after 5 minutes. 3 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG5615. 4 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 25.5 on page 207. 25.4 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. NBG5615 Users Guide 205 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 2 Go to Maint enance > Sys OP Mode. Check your System Operation Mode setting.

If the NBG5615 is in Rout er Mode, make sure the WAN port is connected to a broadband modem or router with Internet access. Your computer and the NBG5615 should be in the same subnet.

If the NBG5615 is in Access Point Mode, make sure the WAN port is connected to a broadband modem or router with Internet access and your computer is set to obtain an dynamic IP address. 3 4 If the NBG5615 is in Rout er Mode, make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard or the WAN screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP. 5 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again. 6 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the NBG5615), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. 1 2 3 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.7 on page 18. Reboot the NBG5615. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. The Internet connection is slow or intermittent. 1 2 3 4 206 There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 1.7 on page 18. If the NBG5615 is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving the NBG5615 closer to the AP if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on). Reboot the NBG5615. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggest ion NBG5615 Users Guide

Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 25.5 Resetting the NBG5615 to Its Factory Defaults If you reset the NBG5615, you lose all of the changes you have made. The NBG5615 re-loads its default settings, and the password resets to 1 2 3 4 . You have to make all of your changes again. You will lose all of your changes when you push the RESET button. To reset the NBG5615:

1 Make sure the power LED is on. 2 3 Press the RESET button for one to four seconds to restart/reboot the NBG5615. Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG5615 back to its factory-default configurations. If the NBG5615 restarts automatically, wait for the NBG5615 to finish restarting, and log in to the Web Configurator. The password is 1234. If the NBG5615 does not restart automatically, disconnect and reconnect the NBG5615s power. Then, follow the directions above again. 25.6 Wireless Connections I cannot access the NBG5615 or ping any computer from the WLAN. 1 Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the NBG5615. 2 Make sure the wireless adapter on your computer is working properly. 3 Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802.11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the NBG5615. 4 Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the transmission range of the NBG5615. 5 Check that both the NBG5615 and the wireless adapter on your computer are using the same wireless and wireless security settings. 6 Make sure traffic between the WLAN and the LAN is not blocked by the firewall on the NBG5615. NBG5615 Users Guide 207 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 7 Make sure you allow the NBG5615 to be remotely accessed through the WLAN interface. Check your remote management settings.

See the chapter on Wireless LAN in the Users Guide for more information. I set up URL keyword blocking, but I can still access a website that should be blocked. Make sure that you select the Enable URL Keyw ord Blocking check box in the Content Filtering screen. Make sure that the keywords that you type are listed in the Keyw ord List . If a keyword that is listed in the Keyw ord List is not blocked when it is found in a URL, customize the keyword blocking using commands. See the Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking section in the Content Filtering chapter. I cannot access the Web Configurator after I switched to AP mode. When you change from router mode to AP mode, your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192.168.1.3 and 192.168.1.254. Refer to Appendix B on page 221 for instructions on how to change your computers IP address. What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this problem?

The following factors may cause interference:

Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on.

Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs.

Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless devices. To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:

Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low.

Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones.

Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and the wireless client.

Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add additional APs if necessary.

Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open that use the Internet. 208 NBG5615 Users Guide

Position the antennas for best reception. If the AP is placed on a table or floor, point the antennas upwards. If the AP is placed at a high position, point the antennas downwards. Try pointing the antennas in different directions and check which provides the strongest signal to the wireless clients. Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 25.7 USB Device Problems I cannot access or see a USB device that is connected to the NBG5615. 1 Be sure to install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility (for NetUSB functionality) first from the included disc, or download the latest version from the zyxel.com website. 2 Disconnect the problematic USB device, then reconnect it to the NBG5615. 3 4 5 6 Ensure that the USB device has power. Check your cable connections. Restart the NBG5615 by disconnecting the power and then reconnecting it. If the USB device requires a special driver, install the driver from the installation disc that came with the device. After driver installation, reconnect the USB device to the NBG5615 and try to connect to it again with your computer. 7 If the problem persists, contact your vendor. What kind of USB devices do the NBG5615 support?

1 It is strongly recommended to use version 2.0 or lower USB storage devices (such as memory sticks, USB hard drives) and/or USB devices (such as USB printers). Other USB products are not guaranteed to function properly with the NBG5615. 25.8 ZyXEL Share Center Utility Problems I cannot access or see a USB device that is connected to the NBG5615. 1 Disconnect the problematic USB device, then reconnect it to the NBG5615. 2 Ensure that the USB device in question has power. NBG5615 Users Guide 209 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 3 4 5 Check your cable connections. Restart the NBG5615 by disconnecting the power and then reconnecting it. If the USB device requires a special driver, install the driver from the installation disc that came with the device. After driver installation, reconnect the USB device to the NBG5615 and try to connect to it again with your computer. 6 If the problem persists, contact your vendor. I cannot install the ZyXEL Share Center Utility. 1 Make sure that the set up program is one required for your operating system. 2 3 Install the latest patches and updates for your operating system. Check the zyxel.com download site for a newer version of the utility. 210 NBG5615 Users Guide A PPENDIX A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device.

JavaScript (enabled by default).

Java permissions (enabled by default). Note: The screens used below belong to Internet Explorer version 6, 7 and 8. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary. Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your devices IP address. Disable Pop-up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop- up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop- up Blocker. Figure 131 Pop-up Blocker You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop- up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. 1 2 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, I nt ernet Opt ions, Privacy. Clear the Block pop- ups check box in the Pop- up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. NBG5615 Users Guide 211 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Figure 132 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Click Apply to save this setting. Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 1 2 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, I nt ernet Opt ions and then the Privacy tab. Select Set t ingsto open the Pop- up Blocker Set t ings screen. 212 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Figure 133 Internet Options: Privacy 3 4 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.167.1. Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allow ed sit es. Figure 134 Pop-up Blocker Settings NBG5615 Users Guide 213 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 5 6 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. Click Apply to save this setting. JavaScript If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScript are allowed. 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, I nt ernet Opt ions and then the Securit y tab. Figure 135 Internet Options: Security 2 3 Click the Cust om Level... button. Scroll down to Script ing. 4 Under Act ive script ing make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 5 Under Script ing of Java applet s make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 6 Click OK to close the window. 214 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Figure 136 Security Settings - Java Scripting Java Permissions 1 2 3 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, I nt ernet Opt ions and then the Securit y tab. Click the Cust om Level... button. Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 4 Under Java perm issions make sure that a safety level is selected. 5 Click OK to close the window. NBG5615 Users Guide 215 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Figure 137 Security Settings - Java JAVA (Sun) 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, I nt ernet Opt ions and then the Advanced tab. 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for < applet > under Java ( Sun) is selected. 3 Click OK to close the window. Figure 138 Java (Sun) 216 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary slightly. The steps below apply to Mozilla Firefox 3.0 as well. You can enable Java, Javascript and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Opt ions in the screen that appears. Figure 139 Mozilla Firefox: TOOLS > Options Click Cont ent to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. Figure 140 Mozilla Firefox Content Security NBG5615 Users Guide 217 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Opera Opera 10 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary slightly. Allowing Pop-Ups From Opera, click Tools, then Preferences. In the General tab, go to Choose how you prefer t o handle pop- ups and select Open all pop- ups. Figure 141 Opera: Allowing Pop-Ups Enabling Java From Opera, click Tools, then Preferences. In the Advanced tab, select Cont ent from the left-

side menu. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. 218 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Figure 142 Opera: Enabling Java To customize JavaScript behavior in the Opera browser, click JavaScript Opt ions. Figure 143 Opera: JavaScript Options Select the items you want Operas JavaScript to apply. NBG5615 Users Guide 219 Appendix A Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 220 NBG5615 Users Guide A PPENDIX B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Note: Your specific NBG5615 may not support all of the operating systems described in this appendix. See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported. This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network. Windows Vista/XP/2000, Mac OS 9/

OS X, and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP/IP on your computer. If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP, make sure that your networks computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet. In this appendix, you can set up an IP address for:

Windows XP/NT/2000 on page 221

Windows Vista on page 225

Windows 7 on page 229

Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 on page 233

Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6 on page 236

Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) on page 239

Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) on page 243 Windows XP/NT/2000 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT. 1 Click St art > Cont rol Panel. NBG5615 Users Guide 221 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 2 In the Cont rol Panel, click the N et w ork Connect ions icon. 3 Right-click Local Area Connect ion and then select Propert ies. 4 On the General tab, select I nt ernet Prot ocol ( TCP/ I P) and then click Propert ies. 222 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 The I nt ernet Prot ocol TCP/ I P Propert ies window opens. NBG5615 Users Guide 223 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 6 Select Obt ain an I P address aut om at ically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use t he follow ing I P Address and fill in the I P address, Subnet m ask, and Default gat ew ay fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DN S server and an Alt ernat e DN S server, if that information was provided. 7 8 Click OK to close the I nt ernet Prot ocol ( TCP/ I P) Propert ies window. Click OK to close the Local Area Connect ion Propert ies window. Verifying Settings 1 2 224 Click St art > All Program s > Accessories > Com m and Prom pt . In the Com m and Prom pt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also go to St art > Cont rol Panel > Net w ork Connect ions, right-click a network connection, click St at us and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information. NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional. 1 Click St art > Cont rol Panel. 2 In the Cont rol Panel, click the N et w ork and I nt ernet icon. 3 Click the N et w ork and Sharing Cent er icon. 4 Click Manage net w ork connect ions. NBG5615 Users Guide 225 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 Right-click Local Area Connect ion and then select Propert ies. Note: During this procedure, click Cont inue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. 6 Select I nt ernet Prot ocol Version 4 ( TCP/ I Pv4 ) and then select Propert ies. 226 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 7 The I nt ernet Prot ocol Version 4 ( TCP/ I Pv4 ) Propert ies window opens. NBG5615 Users Guide 227 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 8 Select Obt ain an I P address aut om at ically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use t he follow ing I P Address and fill in the I P address, Subnet m ask, and Default gat ew ay fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DN S server and an Alt ernat e DN S server, if that information was provided.Click Advanced. 9 Click OK to close the I nt ernet Prot ocol ( TCP/ I P) Propert ies window. 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connect ion Propert ies window. Verifying Settings 1 2 228 Click St art > All Program s > Accessories > Com m and Prom pt . In the Com m and Prom pt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also go to St art > Cont rol Panel > Net w ork Connect ions, right-click a network connection, click St at us and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information. NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Windows 7 This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise. 1 Click St art > Cont rol Panel. 2 In the Cont rol Panel, click View net w ork st at us and t asks under the N et w ork and I nt ernet category. 3 Click Change adapt er set t ings. 4 Double click Local Area Connect ion and then select Propert ies. NBG5615 Users Guide 229 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Note: During this procedure, click Cont inue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. 5 Select I nt ernet Prot ocol Version 4 ( TCP/ I Pv4 ) and then select Propert ies. 230 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 6 The I nt ernet Prot ocol Version 4 ( TCP/ I Pv4 ) Propert ies window opens. NBG5615 Users Guide 231 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 7 Select Obt ain an I P address aut om at ically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use t he follow ing I P Address and fill in the I P address, Subnet m ask, and Default gat ew ay fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DN S server and an Alt ernat e DN S server, if that information was provided. Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP, DNS and WINS. 8 9 Click OK to close the I nt ernet Prot ocol ( TCP/ I P) Propert ies window. Click OK to close the Local Area Connect ion Propert ies window. Verifying Settings Click St art > All Program s > Accessories > Com m and Prom pt . In the Com m and Prom pt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. The IP settings are displayed as follows. 1 2 3 232 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.4 but can also apply to 10.3. 1 Click Apple > Syst em Preferences. 2 In the Syst em Preferences window, click the N et w ork icon. NBG5615 Users Guide 233 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 When the N et w ork preferences pane opens, select Built - in Et hernet from the network connection type list, and then click Configure. 4 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure I Pv4 list in the TCP/ I P tab. 234 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 For statically assigned settings, do the following:

From the Configure I Pv4 list, select Manually.

In the I P Address field, type your IP address.

In the Subnet Mask field, type your subnet mask.

In the Rout er field, type the IP address of your device. 6 Click Apply Now and close the window. Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applicat ions > Ut ilit ies > N et w ork Ut ilit ies, and then selecting the appropriate N et w ork I nt erface from the I nfo tab. NBG5615 Users Guide 235 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Figure 144 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Utility Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.5 but can also apply to 10.6. 1 Click Apple > Syst em Preferences. 2 In Syst em Preferences, click the N et w ork icon. 236 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 When the N et w ork preferences pane opens, select Et hernet from the list of available connection types. 4 From the Configure list, select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings. NBG5615 Users Guide 237 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 For statically assigned settings, do the following:

From the Configure list, select Manually.

In the I P Address field, enter your IP address.

In the Subnet Mask field, enter your subnet mask.

In the Rout er field, enter the IP address of your NBG5615. 6 Click Apply and close the window. Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applicat ions > Ut ilit ies > N et w ork Ut ilit ies, and then selecting the appropriate N et w ork int erface from the I nfo tab. 238 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 145 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Utility Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment (GNOME) using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME:

1 Click Syst em > Adm inist rat ion > N et w ork. 2 When the N et w ork Set t ings window opens, click Unlock to open the Aut hent icat e window. (By default, the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked.) You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password. NBG5615 Users Guide 239 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 In the Aut hent icat e window, enter your admin account name and password then click the Aut hent icat e button. 4 In the N et w ork Set t ings window, select the connection that you want to configure, then click Propert ies. 240 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 The Propert ies dialog box opens.

In the Configurat ion list, select Aut om at ic Configurat ion ( DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address.

In the Configurat ion list, select St at ic I P address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the I P address, Subnet m ask, and Gat ew ay address fields. 6 7 Click OK to save the changes and close the Propert ies dialog box and return to the N et w ork Set t ings screen. If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DN S tab in the N et w ork Set t ings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. NBG5615 Users Guide 241 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 8 Click the Close button to apply the changes. Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Syst em > Adm inist rat ion > N et w ork Tools, and then selecting the appropriate N et w ork device from the Devices tab. The I nt erface St at ist ics column shows data if your connection is working properly. 242 NBG5615 Users Guide Figure 146 Ubuntu 8: Network Tools Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in the K Desktop Environment (KDE) using the openSUSE 10.3 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default openSUSE 10.3 installation. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE:

1 Click K Menu > Com put er > Adm inist rat or Set t ings ( YaST) . NBG5615 Users Guide 243 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 2 When the Run as Root - KDE su dialog opens, enter the admin password and click OK. 3 When the YaST Cont rol Cent er window opens, select N et w ork Devices and then click the N et w ork Card icon. 244 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 4 When the N et w ork Set t ings window opens, click the Overview tab, select the appropriate connection N am e from the list, and then click the Configure button. 5 When the N et w ork Card Set up window opens, click the Address tab NBG5615 Users Guide 245 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Figure 147 openSUSE 10.3: Network Card Setup 6 Select Dynam ic Address ( DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address. Select St at ically assigned I P Address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the I P address, Subnet m ask, and Host nam e fields. 7 8 Click N ext to save the changes and close the N et w ork Card Set up window. If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the Host nam e/ DN S tab in N et w ork Set t ings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. 246 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 9 Click Finish to save your settings and close the window. Verifying Settings Click the KN et w ork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP/IP properties. From the Opt ions sub-menu, select Show Connect ion I nform at ion. Figure 148 openSUSE 10.3: KNetwork Manager When the Connect ion St at us - KN et w ork Manager window opens, click the St at ist ics t ab to see if your connection is working properly. NBG5615 Users Guide 247 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Figure 149 openSUSE: Connection Status - KNetwork Manager 248 NBG5615 Users Guide A PPENDIX C Common Services The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. For a comprehensive list of port numbers, ICMP type/code numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) web site.

N am e: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like.

Prot ocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/ UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER- DEFI N ED, the Port ( s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number.

Port ( s) : This value depends on the Prot ocol. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers.

If the Prot ocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/ UDP, this is the IP port number.

If the Prot ocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.

Descript ion: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used. Table 84 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION User-Defined 51 AH

(IPSEC_TUNNEL) AIM/New-ICQ AUTH BGP BOOTP_CLIENT BOOTP_SERVER CU-SEEME TCP TCP TCP UDP UDP TCP UDP DNS TCP/UDP ESP

(IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined FINGER FTP H.323 TCP TCP TCP TCP The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. AOLs Internet Messenger service. It is also used as a listening port by ICQ. Authentication protocol used by some servers. Border Gateway Protocol. DHCP Client. DHCP Server. A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (for example www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. 5190 113 179 68 67 7648 24032 53 50 79 20 21 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol. NBG5615 Users Guide 249 Appendix C Common Services Table 84 Commonly Used Services (continued) NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) 80 443 1 4000 2 500 6667 1863 5190 144 2049 119 HTTP HTTPS ICMP ICQ TCP TCP User-Defined UDP IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined IKE IRC UDP TCP/UDP MSN Messenger TCP NEW-ICQ NEWS NFS NNTP PING POP3 PPTP PPTP_TUNNEL

(GRE) RCMD REAL_AUDIO REXEC RLOGIN RTELNET RTSP TCP TCP UDP TCP User-Defined 1 TCP TCP 110 1723 User-Defined 47 TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP 512 7070 514 513 107 554 DESCRIPTION Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/

server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce. Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes. This is a popular Internet chat program. Internet Group Management Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management. This is another popular Internet chat program. Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. An Internet chat program. A protocol for news groups. Network File System - NFS is a client/

server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol. 250 NBG5615 Users Guide Table 84 Commonly Used Services (continued) NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) SMTP TCP 25 SNMP SNMP-TRAPS SQL-NET TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP SSH STRM WORKS SYSLOG TACACS TELNET TCP/UDP UDP UDP UDP TCP TFTP UDP 161 162 1521 22 1558 514 49 23 69 Appendix C Common Services DESCRIPTION Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215). Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/

IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP (Transmission Control Protocol). VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution. NBG5615 Users Guide 251 Appendix C Common Services 252 NBG5615 Users Guide A PPENDIX D Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2012 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Trademarks NetUSB is a trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference.

This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. 1 2 3 4 FCC Radiation Exposure Statement

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11n (20MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. IEEE 802.11n (40MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 3 through 9.

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Industry Canada Statement This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause interference and 2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum gain of 2dBi. Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful communication. IC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. NBG5615 Users Guide 253 Appendix D Legal Information

Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Viewing Certifications Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this products documentation and certifications. ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. Open Source Licenses This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact support@zyxel.com.tw to get it. Regulatory Information European Union The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union. Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) Compliance Information for 2.4GHz and 5GHz Wireless Products Relevant to the EU and Other Countries Following the EU Directive 1999/5/EC

(R&TTE Directive)

[Czech]

[Danish]

[German]

[Estonian]

English

[Spanish]

ZyXEL tmto prohlauje, e tento zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/EC. Undertegnede ZyXEL erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Hiermit erklrt ZyXEL, dass sich das Gert Ausstattung in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Hereby, ZyXEL declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. 254 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix D Legal Information

ZyXEL

1999/5/C. Par la prsente ZyXEL dclare que l'appareil quipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC. Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. noteikumiem. Ar o ZyXEL deklar, ka iekrtas atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem iuo ZyXEL deklaruoja, kad is ranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, jiddikjara li dan tagmir jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Alulrott, ZyXEL nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezs megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EK irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Niniejszym ZyXEL owiadcza, e sprzt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL declara que este equipamento est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenia spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL vakuuttaa tten ett laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EC.

ZyXEL ,

1999/5/C. Hr me lsir, ZyXEL v yfir a essi bnaur er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og nnur vieigandi kvi tilskipunar 1999/5/EC. Erklrer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I direktiv 1999/5/EF. Prin prezenta, ZyXEL declar c acest echipament este n conformitate cu cerinele eseniale i alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC.

[Greek]

[French]

[Italian]

[Latvian]

[Lithuanian]

[Dutch]

[Maltese]

[Hungarian]

[Polish]

[Portuguese]

[Slovenian]

[Slovak]

[Finnish]

[Swedish]

[Bulgarian]

[Icelandic]

[Norwegian]

[Romanian]

National Restrictions This product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below:

Ce produit peut tre utilis dans tous les pays de lUE (et dans tous les pays ayant transposs la directive 1999/5/CE) sans aucune limitation, except pour les pays mentionns ci-dessous:

Questo prodotto utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU (ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttive EU 1999/5/EC) senza nessuna limitazione, eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito:

Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschrnkungen eingesetzt werden (sowie in anderen Staaten die der EU Direktive 1995/5/CE folgen) mit Aunahme der folgenden aufgefhrten Staaten:

In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2, 4- and 5-GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries inwhich additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable. The requirements for any country may evolve. ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for both the 2,4- and 5-GHz wireless LANs. The following countries have restrictions and/or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled Overview of Regulat ory Requirem ent s for Wireless LANs:. Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs Frequency Band (MHz) Max Power Level

(EIRP)1 (mW) Indoor ONLY Indoor and Outdoor 2400-2483.5 5150-5350 5470-5725 100 200 1000 V V V NBG5615 Users Guide 255 Appendix D Legal Information Belgium The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details. Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens. Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extrieur dune distance suprieure 300 mtres doivent tre notifies lInstitut Belge des services Postaux et des Tlcommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples dtails. Denmark In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage. I Danmark m frekvensbndet 5150 - 5350 ogs anvendes udendrs. Italy This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a general authorization. Please check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details. Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una Autorizzazione Generale. Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli. Latvia The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please check http://

www.esd.lv for more details. 2.4 GHz frekvenu joslas izmantoanai rpus telpm nepiecieama atauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairk informcijas: http://www.esd.lv. Notes:

1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in those countries. 2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used(specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm). List of national codes COUNTRY Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Safety Warnings ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE AT BE CY CR DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IE IT LV LT LU Malta Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden United Kingdom Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Switzerland Bulgaria Romania Turkey MT NL PL PT SK SI ES SE GB IS LI NO CH BG RO TR

Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.

Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.

Do NOT store things on the device.

Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.

Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.

Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.

Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.

Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.

Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.

Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe).

Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord.

Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.

If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the power outlet. 256 NBG5615 Users Guide Appendix D Legal Information

Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.

Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.

Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged.

Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. NBG5615 Users Guide 257 Appendix D Legal Information 258 NBG5615 Users Guide Index Index D Daylight saving 196 DDNS 149 see also Dynamic DNS service providers 149 DHCP 90, 133 DHCP server see also Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server 130, 133 Digital Living Network Alliance 184 disclaimer 253 DLNA 183, 184 indexing 186 overview 183 rescan 186 DLNA-compliant client 184 DNS 135 DNS Server 96 DNS server 135 documentation related 2 Domain Name System 135 Domain Name System. See DNS. duplex setting 60, 69 Dynamic DNS 149 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 133 DynDNS 149 DynDNS see also DDNS 149 E encryption 107 and local (user) database 108 key 108 WPA compatible 108 ESSID 207 A ActiveX 162 Address Assignment 96 AP 15 AP Mode menu 69 status screen 67 AP+Bridge 15 B Bandwidth management overview 165 priority 167 services 171 BitTorrent 171 Bridge/Repeater 15 C certifications 253 notices 254 viewing 254 Channel 59, 68 channel 106 CIFS 185 Common Internet File System, see CIFS Configuration restore 198 content filtering 161 by keyword (in URL) 161 Cookies 162 copyright 253 CPU usage 60, 68 NBG5615 Users Guide 259 Index F FCC interference statement 253 file sharing 184 access right 187, 189 bandwidth 189 example 189 FTP 188 overview 184 Samba 186 user account 187, 188 Windows Explorer 186 work group 186 File Transfer Program 171 Firewall 156 Firewall overview guidelines 156 ICMP packets 157 network security Stateful inspection 156 ZyXEL device firewall 156 firewall stateful inspection 155 Firmware upload 196 file extension using HTTP firmware version 59, 68 FTP. see also File Transfer Program 171 G General wireless LAN screen 110 Guest WLAN 108 Guest WLAN Bandwidth 109 Guide Quick Start 2 H HTTP 171 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol 171 I IGMP 97 see also Internet Group Multicast Protocol version IGMP version 97 Internet Group Multicast Protocol 97 IP Address 131, 132, 142 IP alias 130 IP Pool 134 J Java 162 L LAN 129 IP pool setup 130 LAN overview 129 LAN setup 129 LAN TCP/IP 130 Language 199 Link type 60, 69 local (user) database 107 and encryption 108 Local Area Network 129 M MAC 121 MAC address 96, 107 cloning 96 MAC address filter 107 MAC address filtering 121 MAC filter 121 managing the device good habits 16 using the web configurator. See web configurator. using the WPS. See WPS. MBSSID 15 260 NBG5615 Users Guide Index Media access control 121 media client 183 media file 183, 186 type 186 media server 183 overview 183 meida file play 183 Memory usage 60, 68 mode 15 Multicast 97 IGMP 97 N NAT 139, 142 global 140 how it works 141 inside 140 local 140 outside 140 overview 139 port forwarding 146 see also Network Address Translation server 140 server sets 146 NAT Traversal 177 Navigation Panel 60, 69 navigation panel 60, 69 Network Address Translation 139, 142 O operating mode 15 other documentation 2 P P2P 171 peer-to-peer 171 Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 99 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 101 Pool Size 134 Port forwarding 142, 146 default server 142, 146 example 146 local server 142 port numbers services port speed 60, 69 PPPoE 99 dial-up connection PPTP 101 product registration 254 Q Quality of Service (QoS) 123 Quick Start Guide 2 R RADIUS server 107 registration product 254 related documentation 2 Remote management and NAT 174 limitations 173 system timeout 174 Reset button 16 Reset the device 16 Restore configuration 198 Roaming 123 Router Mode status screen 57 RTS/CTS Threshold 106, 123 S Samba 185 Scheduling 126 Server Message Block, see SMB Service and port numbers 159, 170 NBG5615 Users Guide 261 Index Service Set 53, 110, 120 Service Set IDentification 53, 110, 120 Service Set IDentity. See SSID. Session Initiated Protocol 171 SIP 171 SMB 185 SSID 53, 59, 68, 106, 110, 120 stateful inspection firewall 155 Static DHCP 134 Static Route 151 Status 57 Subnet Mask 131, 132 Summary DHCP table 90 Packet statistics 91 Wireless station status 92 System General Setup 193 System restart 199 T TCP/IP configuration 133 Time setting 195 trademarks 253 trigger port 147 Trigger port forwarding 147 example 147 process 147 U Universal Plug and Play 177 Application 177 Security issues 177 UPnP 177 URL Keyword Blocking 162 USB media sharing 183 user authentication 107 local (user) database 107 RADIUS server 107 User Name 150 V VoIP 171 VPN 101 W Wake On LAN 175 WAN (Wide Area Network) 95 WAN MAC address 96 warranty 254 note 254 Web Configurator how to access 39 Overview 39 web configurator 16 Web Proxy 162 WEP Encryption 114, 116 WEP encryption 113 WEP key 113 windows media player 183 Wireless association list 92 wireless channel 207 wireless LAN 207 wireless LAN scheduling 126 Wireless network basic guidelines 106 channel 106 encryption 107 example 105 MAC address filter 107 overview 105 security 106 SSID 106 Wireless security 106 overview 106 type 106 wireless security 207 Wireless tutorial 73 Wizard setup 27 WLAN button 17 WoL 175 work group 185 name 185 262 NBG5615 Users Guide Index Windows 185 World Wide Web 171 WPA compatible 108 WPS 16 WWW 171 X Xbox Live 171 NBG5615 Users Guide 263 Index 264 NBG5615 Users Guide A PPENDIX D Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2012 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Trademarks NetUSB is a trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference.

This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. 1 2 3 4 FCC Radiation Exposure Statement

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11n (20MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. IEEE 802.11n (40MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 3 through 9.

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Industry Canada Statement This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause interference and 2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum gain of 2dBi. Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful communication. IC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. FCC Statement The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. NBG5615 Users Guide 253